JP6511086B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention, when stopping result aspect of fluctuation display game became a special result aspect, of possible gaming machine generates a favorable special game state for the player.

Conventionally, it comprises a variable display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on a plurality of identification information, and start storage means for storing the right of execution of the variable display game as a start memory when the gaming ball wins the start winning opening. A gaming machine is known which is configured to execute a variable display game based on the start memory.

In such a gaming machine, a random number value is extracted and stored at the time of winning of the gaming ball to the starting winning opening, and when the random number value is a big hit value, the stop result mode of the variable display game is a special result While displaying as an aspect, the special game state advantageous to the player is generated.

Also, in recent years, in a state where the starting memory is stored in the starting memory means and the variable display game is on standby, it is determined whether or not the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is a big hit (prefetching determination). When the random number value is the big hit value, there is a function of giving a notice of the occurrence of the special game state in the variable display game executed before the variable display game corresponding to the start memory is executed. A game machine provided is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-340042

Although the above-mentioned gaming machine reports pre-reading judgment in the starting memory display which displays starting memory , obsolescence can not be avoided by daily progress in a production side.

The present invention aims at providing a high-meta gaming machine interest when notifying the pre-read determination in start memory display.

According to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player when a stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, in connection with the variable display game. A display device capable of displaying an image, start storage means capable of storing the right to execute the variable display game as start storage within a predetermined number of ranges, and the start storage is stored in the start storage means A start storage display means for displaying a start storage display corresponding to the start storage on the display device, and a predetermination means for determining in advance a stop result mode of the variable display game, the start storage display means Is the start-up memory display when the start-up memory is generated, based on the normal start-up memory display mode, which is a normal mode, or the special result mode based on the determination result of the predetermination means. It is possible to display in any one of a plurality of special start memory display modes which is an aspect having high reliability, and the display mode of the start memory display is a plurality of the special start when the variable display game is started. A variable display game start updating means capable of changing to any of the memory display modes, and a start memory display non-display that hides the start memory display when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display device And display means for executing advance notice display which is an effect relating to the change of the start memory display to the special start memory display mode, and the non-display of the start memory display by the start memory display non-display means can be executed. the starting storage ratio to the special start memory display mode the display is not 0, and non of the starting storage display by the start memory show means corresponding to the start memory that occur during the display And wherein the less than the proportion of said special start memory display mode the start memory display corresponding to the start memory that occurred when not running shown.
In the gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, the game machine according to the second aspect is related to the variable display game. The start storage is stored in the start storage means, the start storage means capable of storing the right to execute the variable display game as the start storage within a predetermined number of ranges; A start storage display means for displaying a start storage display corresponding to the start storage on the display device, and a predetermination means for determining in advance a stop result mode of the change display game, the change display The right to execute the game can be generated by winning of the game ball to the starting area provided in the game area, and there are a plurality of starting areas, and the starting memory display means is the starting memory A plurality of special start-ups having high reliability as the special result mode based on the determination result of the normal start-up memory display mode which is the normal mode or the pre-judgment means which is the normal mode. It can be displayed in any of the memory display modes, and the display mode of the start memory display is changed to any of a plurality of the special start memory display modes when the variable display game is started. The variable display game start time updating means, and the starting memory display non-displaying means for hiding the starting memory display when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display device; The start-up updating means starts the second variable display game to be executed after the first variable display game in which the start memory display non-display means is not executed. The starting memory that is to start the game corresponds to a different starting memory of the starting area, and at least the starting memory display displayed during the first variable display game, a plurality of the special starting It is characterized in that it can be changed to any of the memory display modes.

According to the onset bright, the interest when notifying the pre-read determination in start memory display it is possible to provide a high-meta gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a game machine at the time of the glass frame opening of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the center case of the first embodiment of the present invention is attached. It is a perspective view of the playboard of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, a center case, and a presentation apparatus unit. It is a perspective view of a game board in the state where the center case of a 1st embodiment of the present invention was removed. It is an exploded perspective view of a center case of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows the distribution apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is an exploded perspective view of the distribution apparatus arrange | positioned by center case, (B) is installed in center case. It is a front view of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the presentation apparatus unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of a unit base member of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the lower performance apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lower performance apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a back view of the movable part of a lower performance apparatus, (B) is a perspective view of a lower performance apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of a back side effect device of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the shutter unit on the left side of the back side effect device of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining rotation operation | movement of the rotation door of the shutter unit of the left side of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the slide operation of the shutter unit of the left side of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a lower decoration unit of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of the intermediate member which constitutes the lower decoration unit of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a decoration member attached to an intermediate member of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the lower decoration unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the front view which expanded a part of lower decoration unit, (B) is a BB surface of (A). It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the lower decoration unit which meets. It is a perspective view of the flow-path structural member which comprises the lower decorative unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper decoration unit of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the upper performance apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the light-guide plate which comprises the movable display unit of the upper effect apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a cross-sectional view of the upper performance apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the movable display unit and drive mechanism of the upper effect device of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the upper performance apparatus in the state which removed the fixed base of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a right part effect device of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a longitudinal section perspective view of the right part effect device of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view of a movable decoration unit and a drive mechanism of a right part effect device of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the right part effect device in the state where the fixed base of a 1st embodiment of the present invention was removed. It is a perspective view of the upper decoration member of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a left upper enlarged perspective view of the upper decoration member of the state which attached the game board of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of a periphery of a common view starting gate in FIG. 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of a periphery of the special winning opening solenoid in FIG. 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 31 is a rear perspective view of a portion around a common view starting gate in FIG. 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment state of the static elimination unit in the state by which the glass frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention was open | released. It is a perspective exploded view of the static elimination unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a back surface perspective view of the static elimination unit of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the static elimination unit in FIG. 34 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the operation aspect of the static elimination unit when it accommodates in the frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the operation aspect of the static elimination unit when it accommodates in the frame of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the static elimination unit of the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specification of the game machine of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, (A) is specification of a change display game, (B) is a big hit state (special game when special figure change display game is won) State of occurrence), (C) is the round distribution table 1 including the selection probability of the number of rounds of the jackpot state when the game ball passes the lottery gate, (D) is the case when the game ball passes the fixed gate The round distribution table 2 including the number of rounds in the big hit state is shown. It is a figure explaining transition of the state in the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control system centering on the gaming control device of the gaming machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block block diagram which shows the control system centering on the presentation control apparatus of the game machine of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the first half of the main processing of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of the second half of the main processing of the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interrupt processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the distribution state update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the passage gate switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure usual processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change start process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is the special figure 1 change start process performed at the time of the start of a 1st special figure change display game, (B) Is a special figure 2 variation start process executed at the start of the second special figure variation display game. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation | variation start information setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, and in the case of a first special figure fluctuation display game, (A) is a second special figure fluctuation display It is the case of the game. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during special figure change of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing shift setting processing during special figure display of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing under special figure display of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process transfer setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit round determination process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transfer setting process 1 in fanfare / interval during the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the presentation mode information check process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time reduction change frequency update process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time saving end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows a big hit end setting process 1, (B) shows a big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol change control processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the electric wave fraud monitoring process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process performed by the microcomputer (1st CPU) for main control of the presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the interruption process in the presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process performed by the image control microcomputer (2ndCPU) of the presentation control apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 1st scene control processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the main display apparatus (variable display apparatus) of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a sub display apparatus, (A) is a customer waiting state, (B) is except a customer waiting state. It shows. It is a figure which shows the structure of the sub display apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is a display screen of a sub display apparatus, (B) is a common drawing game auxiliary display area, (C) is a special figure change. A state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the display game is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the customer waiting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during change of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which looked at the back side effect device of the 1st embodiment of the present invention from the upper right, and (A) shows the state before slide operation of a shutter unit, and (B) shows the state after slide operation. It is the figure which looked at the back side effect device of the 1st embodiment of the present invention from the front, (A) is a state before pivoting door pivots, (B) is a state after pivoting door pivots. It shows the state. It is a figure explaining the lower performance apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows the state after operation of a lower decoration member before operation of a lower decoration member, and (B) shows the state after operation of a lower decoration member. It is a figure which shows the main display apparatus from the start of a variable display game to temporary stop in the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a sub display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the development effect performed by an upper presentation apparatus (sub display apparatus) after temporary stop of a variable display game in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right part presentation operation control processing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example which displays description of operation | movement of the right part presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the right part presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of the right part presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the result of the presentation by the right part presentation apparatus of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing under big hit round determination of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the round determination method explanatory process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the emission mode setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the injection | emission timing alerting | reporting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the gate passage sound corresponding to the round number determination command of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the status alerting | reporting image corresponding to the distribution status command of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows after showing the description of the big hit round determination method after the big hit of 1st Embodiment of this invention generate | occur | produces. A state in which the description of the game for determining the big hit round of the first embodiment of the present invention is displayed on the main display device. It is a figure which shows the display of the selection candidate of the discharge alerting | reporting aspect for determining the big hit round of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows selection of the selection candidate of the alerting | reporting alerting | reporting aspect for determining the big hit round of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of alerting | reporting of the discharge alerting | reporting timing of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) is waiting, (B) has shown discharge. It is a figure which shows an example of selection of the designated big hit determination method of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (A) shows after selection and (B) at the time of selection. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the right-handed warning command reception process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of a right hitting warning of a 1st embodiment of the present invention, and (A) is a game ball by making a 1st passing gate part or a 2nd passing gate part by performing a right hitting during a normal game. Shows how the vehicle passes, and (B) shows how a right-handed warning is issued. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of game machine error monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of human detection sensor error processing of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining arrangement | positioning and the detection range of the magnetic sensor of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and a human sensor. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the error alerting | reporting of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 17 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect in the case where the starting memory display is not moved and the shell is hit in the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a screen transition diagram for explaining prefetching effects when there is a winning to be prefetched in the hold storage 3 in the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect when the starting memory display does not move and the shell is not hit in the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition diagram explaining the pre-reading effect when the starting memory display moves and the shell is hit in the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 18 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect when the starting memory display is moved and the shell is not hit in the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining display of starting memory when a new winning combination arises at the time of execution of pre-reading effect in a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the mode by which the display of several starting memory is pre-notified advance notice by one animation in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition diagram explaining a prize animation in modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition diagram explaining a digestive animation in modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the case where advance notice display is performed in modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect other than at the time of winning in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining control of animation 1 in timing when a new variable display game is performed in modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram for explaining, among the pre-reading effects other than at the time of winning, the pre-reading effect at the timing when the starting memory is digested, in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart explaining control of animation 2 in timing when a new change display game is performed in modification 1 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the non-display mode of the starting memory display at the time of reach production in the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition diagram explaining a winning animation when the lottery result of the winning start memory in the modified example 2 of the second embodiment of the present invention is "release". It is a screen transition diagram explaining a winning animation when the lottery result of the winning start memory is "hit" in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram for explaining a winning animation which is displayed as a special mode in which a winning with a high degree of reliability occurs during reach in a second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition diagram in the case where the reliability of the starting memory for which winning is achieved during reach is low and it is displayed as a normal form in the modification 2 of the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a winning animation in the case where a winning hit with a high hit or reliability has occurred in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the ratio which performs a prize animation in the modification 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram when a winning occurs during the reach in the modification 3 of the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect in the case where the start winning opening is only the special view 1 in the modification 4 of the second embodiment of the present invention. In the fourth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, there are a plurality of starting winning openings with the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the pre-reading effect in the case where the starting storage of the special view 2 is not executed preferentially is explained. Screen transition diagram. In the fourth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, there are provided a plurality of starting winning openings with the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the pre-reading effect in the case where the starting memory of the special view 2 is preferentially executed is described. Screen transition diagram. In the fifth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, there are provided a plurality of starting winning openings with the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the pre-reading effect in the case where the starting memory of the special view 2 is preferentially executed is described. Screen transition diagram. It is a figure which shows the form of a starting memory display in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display part of starting memory in modification 6 of a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the display mode 1 of the starting memory display in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the display mode 2 of the starting memory display in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the display mode 3 of the starting memory display in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the display mode 4 of the starting memory display in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the display mode 5 of the starting memory display in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a screen transition figure explaining the display mode 6 of the starting memory display in the modification 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the embodiment refer to the direction viewed from the game board (the direction viewed from the player).

[Game machine configuration]
First, with reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the whole structure of the game machine 1 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 closed.
FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 with only the glass frame 6 opened.

As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the gaming machine 1 includes an opening / closing frame 4 attached to the main body frame 2 fixed to the island facility via a hinge 3 so that the right side portion can open and close freely. The opening and closing frame 4 is configured by the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6.

The front frame 5 is a frame having a storage portion (game board storage portion) 5a capable of storing the game board 30 (see FIG. 3). While the game board 30 is disposed on the front frame 5, a glass frame 6 provided with a cover glass 6a that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached. The front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 are
Each can be opened individually. For example, only the glass frame 6 can be opened to access the game area 31 (see FIG. 3) of the game board 30. Further, by opening the front frame 5 in a state in which the glass frame 6 is not opened, the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 (see FIG. 4) disposed on the back side of the game board 30 It is possible to access the power supply device 800, the payout control device 640, and the like disposed at the lower rear surface.

A storage unit 641 for storing gaming balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in an island facility is provided at the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 5, and the storage unit 6 is provided on the back side of the left side of the front frame 5.
A payout unit 642 is provided to pay out the gaming balls having flowed down from 41 to the upper tray 11a.
The payout control device 640 is a device that controls the operation of the payout unit 642.

A decorative member 7 is disposed around the cover glass 6 a of the glass frame 6. Decorative member 7
The frame decoration device 21 (see FIG. 44) formed of an LED or the like is accommodated in the inside, and the light emission state of the decoration member 7 can be adjusted by controlling the frame decoration device 21.

A lighting unit 8 is disposed on the top of the glass frame 6, and movable lights 9 are disposed on both left and right sides of the lighting unit 8. The lighting unit 8 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside.
A light emission effect is performed according to the gaming state. The movable illumination 9 includes an illumination member such as an LED, and a frame effect device 22 (see FIG. 44) including an illumination drive motor for driving the illumination member. The frame effect device 22 of the movable illumination 9 is controlled to rotationally drive the illumination member according to the game state. In addition, the illumination member arrange | positioned by the inside of the illumination unit 8 and the movable illumination 9 also comprises a part of frame decoration apparatus 21 (refer FIG. 44).

In addition, a reinforcing sheet metal 6b is disposed on the back surface of the glass frame 6, and the reinforcing sheet metal 6b has a conductive portion 6c projecting rearward so as to be in contact with a charge removal unit 900 (see FIG. 3) of the game board 30 described later. . Conducting portion 6c functions as a grounding member, and removing the static electricity charged on gaming board 30 when conducting portion 6c contacts conductive member 901 (see FIG. 34) of static elimination unit 900.

The gaming machine 1 emits an effect sound, an alarm sound, an alarm sound, etc.
b. The upper speakers 10 a are disposed on upper side portions of the glass frame 6, and the lower speakers 10 b are disposed at lower left corners of the front frame 5.

At the upper right of the movable illumination 9 on the left side, a gaming state notification LED 12 for notifying of an abnormality in the gaming machine 1 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine 1, the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on or blinks, and an alarm sound for notifying an abnormality is output from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

The abnormality occurring in the gaming machine 1 includes the failure of the gaming machine 1 and the implementation of a wrongdoing. The injustice includes, for example, an act of illegally operating the trajectory of the launched game ball by a magnet, an act of oscillating a radio wave with respect to a starting opening switch of the gaming machine 1 or the like, and the like. These cheating is
The magnetic sensor 23 (see FIG. 43) detects magnetism, and the radio wave sensor 24 (see FIG. 43) detects a radio wave.

In addition, an act of opening the opening and closing frame 4 illegally is included in the injustice. The open / close state of the front frame 5 is detected by a front frame open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 43), and the open / close state of the glass frame 6 is detected by a glass frame open detection switch 26 (see FIG. 43).

At the lower front of the glass frame 6, an upper tray unit 11 including an upper tray 11a is provided. Upper plate 1
The game balls stored in 1 a are supplied to a ball launch unit 13 provided at the lower part of the front frame 5.

A lower plate 14 is installed on the front frame 5 below the ball launch unit 13, and an operation handle 15 for controlling the operation of the ball launch unit 13 is installed in the lower right corner of the front frame 5 . By the player turning the operation handle 15, the ball firing unit 13 shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 11a to the game area 31 of the game board 30. The lower plate 14
A ball removing mechanism 16 is provided for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 14 to the outside.

In the upper tray unit 11, an effect button 17 for receiving an operation input from a player is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 11a. In addition, the selection button 29 is provided on the outer periphery of the effect button 17
Is arranged. The variation display device 35 is operated by the player operating the effect button 17.
In the variable display game (see FIG. 4), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is made to intervene, and in the normal gaming state, the effect pattern (effect mode) can be changed. The variation display game includes a special view variation display game and a common view variation display game, and in the present specification, when it is simply a variation display game, it refers to a special view variation display game.

The normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a specific gaming state has not occurred. The specific gaming state is, for example, a probability variation state (probability variation state) of a probability that the lottery probability of the variation display game is high,
The lottery probability of the variable display game is a normal probability, but it is possible to improve the number of executions of the variable display game per unit time (time reduction fluctuation state), the big hit gaming state (special game state)
Or a small hit game state etc.

Here, the probability change state continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until the variable number display game is executed a predetermined number of times (count number type), and wins a predetermined probability fall lottery Things (continuation lottery type) etc. which are continued until it is possible are considered.

In the loop type, it is decided whether or not to generate the probability variation state by the big hit symbol random number and the probability variation state is generated, and in the number cut type and the falling lottery type, the probability variation state is always generated when the big hit occurs. However, a winning device or the like provided with a specific area may be provided to generate a positive change state when the game ball passes through the specific area.

Below the decorative member 7 of the glass frame 6, a ball lending button 18 operated when the player borrows a game ball, and a discharge button 19 operated to eject a prepaid card etc. from a card unit (not shown) And are arranged. Further, a balance display unit 20 for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like is provided between the ball lending button 18 and the discharging button 19.

[Play board configuration]
The gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 with the center case (front component) 34 attached. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board 30, the center case 34, and the effect device unit (back surface component member) 200. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5 shows the gaming board 30 with the center case 34 removed.
FIG. The front component and the back component may be collectively referred to as a center case.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 30 is a rectangular game board 32 made of plastic or the like.
A substantially circular game area 31 is formed by providing a metal guide rail 32a and a conductive resin partition member 32b on the surface of the. The game board 32 is a transparent member that can be seen behind. Game board 32, guide rails 32a for partitioning the gaming area 31, and partitioning members 3
The game board main body is constituted by 2b.

At the upper right corner of the game board 30, a static elimination unit 900 is provided for releasing static electricity charged on the game board 32 to the glass frame 6 and removing it. In addition, the detail of the static elimination unit 900 is later mentioned in FIGS. 34-40.

Clamp-like fixing members provided on the front frame 5 at the upper right corner and the lower right corner of the game board 30
In the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30, an engagement hook 5b (see FIG. 2) provided on the front frame 5 can be engaged. An engagement receiving portion 32d is formed. The game board 30 is stored in the storage section 5 a of the front frame 5 by the fixing member of the front frame 5 and the engagement hook 5 b engaging with the fixed receiving section 32 c and the engagement receiving section 32 d of the game board 30. It is fixed to the front of the front frame 5.

In the game area 31, a center case (front component) 34 having an opening (display window) 34a is disposed. An opening 32 shaped along the outer periphery of the center case 34 in the gaming board 32
e is formed, and the center case 34 is fitted into the opening 32e from the front.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the back side of the game board 30, a rendering device unit (back surface component member) 200 composed of various rendering devices is disposed, and on the back side of the rendering device unit 200, a display unit 70 and main control A unit 80 is provided. The display unit 70 includes a variable display device 35 as a main display device, and an effect control device 700 that controls effects and the like displayed on the variable display device 35. The main control unit 80 includes a game control device 600 and a base member 81 for rotatably attaching the game control device 600 to the effect device unit 200.
And.

As shown in FIG.3 and FIG.4, the variable display apparatus 35 of the display unit 70 has the display part 35a which can display the variable display game which carries out the variable display of several identification information. Center case 34
The opening 34a of the variable display 35 is provided corresponding to the display 35a of the variable display 35, and the display 35a of the variable display 35 can be viewed through the opening (display window) 34a of the center case 34. ing.

The display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 is a liquid crystal display capable of displaying an arbitrary image, and a plurality of identification information (special symbols) on the display screen, characters for producing a variable display game, and the like are based on the progress of the game. The image is displayed. The variable display device 35 is configured to set a plurality of variable display areas (for example, three variable display areas on the left side, the center, and the right side) on the display unit 35a, and can display independent images in each display area. ing. The variable display device 35 is not limited to one provided with a liquid crystal display, but may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game area 31 on the left side of the center case 34 is provided with a common drawing start gate 36 for establishing a start condition of a normal symbol (common drawing) variation display game when the game ball passes. Be done. When the game ball driven into the game area 31 passes the common view start gate 36,
A common drawing variation display game is executed.

In the lower left gaming area 31 of the center case 34, three general winning openings 40 are arranged, and in the lower right gaming area 31 of the center case 34, one general winning opening 40 is arranged.

In the lower game area 31 of the center case 34, a first start winning opening (first start winning area) 37 for giving a start condition of the special view variation display game is provided, and immediately below that, a second start winning opening ( A second start winning area) 38 is provided. The second start winning opening 38 is provided with a pair of movable members 38 a that are opened in the shape of a reverse “C” at the upper side, and are converted into a state in which gaming balls are easily introduced. When the gaming ball wins the first starting winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38, a special symbol (special figure) variation display game is executed.

Normally, the pair of movable members 38a of the second start winning opening 38 is in a closed state (a state in which the player is not likely to receive a prize) that is spaced about the diameter of the gaming ball. However, since the first starting winning opening 37 is provided above the second starting winning opening 38, the gaming ball can not win the second starting winning opening 38 when the movable member 38a is in the closed state. It has become.

The movable member 38a is configured such that, when the result of the common view variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode,
The game ball is opened in a reverse "ha" shape through the universal power solenoid 27 (see FIG. 43), and the gaming ball changes into an open state (a winning easy state advantageous to the player) which easily flows into the second start winning opening 38 (conversion)
Do.

The movable member 38a is controlled by a game control device 600 described later. The gaming control device 600 raises the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state or prolongs the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state in a definite change state or a short time state as compared to the normal game state. It is referred to as "Puden support state".

In the game area 31 between the first start winning opening 37 and the normal winning opening 40 on the right, the first big winning is achieved by turning the upper end side to the front side by the big winning opening solenoid 28a (see FIG. 43). There is provided a first special variation winning device 41 having an open / close door 41a of an attacker type that opens the mouth. The first special variation winning device 41 converts the state in which the first large winning opening is closed (blocked condition disadvantageous to the player) to open (special game condition advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special view variation display game. Also, by facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the first big winning opening, a predetermined gaming value (winning balls) is given to the player. In addition, the lower count switch 605a ~ as a detection means to detect the game ball that has entered the special winning opening in the first special winning opening
605 m (see FIG. 43) are provided.

In the upper left portion of the center case 34, there is provided a second special variation winning device 42 having a rotating portion 42a which opens the second large winning opening by rotating with the special winning opening solenoid 28b (see FIG. 43). It is done. Similar to the first special variation winning device 41, the second special variation winning device 42 is opened from the state in which the second large winning opening is closed by the result of the special view variation display game (blocked disadvantageous to the player) ( The player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) by converting it into a special game state advantageous to the player and facilitating the flow of the game ball into the second big winning opening. . In the second big winning opening, an upper count switch 606 (see FIG. 43) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the big winning opening.

General winning opening 40, first starting winning opening 37, second starting winning opening 38, first special variation winning device 4
When the gaming ball has won in the first big winning opening of 1, and the second big winning opening of the second special variation winning device 42, the payout control device 640 pays out the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening that has won the prize. Unit 642
It discharges to the upper plate 11a. Generally, the number of winning balls (for example, 15) at the time of winning in the big winning opening is the largest, followed by the general winning opening 40 (for example, 10) and the starting winning opening (for example, 3)
The number of winning balls in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening, or the number of winning balls in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be made different.

In the gaming area 31 below the second start winning opening 38, an out port 43 is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a winning opening or the like.

Further, outside the gaming area 31 and in the lower right part of the gaming board 32, a batch display displaying a special view variation display game (special view 1 variation display game, special view 2 variation display game) and a common view variation display game An apparatus 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special view fluctuation display unit (special view 1 display) 51 for a variable display game and a second special view fluctuation display unit 51 configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. Special figure 2
Display unit 52, a common drawing fluctuation display unit (common drawing display unit) 53 for common drawing fluctuation display game, and a memory display unit for notification of starting (pending) stored number of each variable display game (special drawing 1 pending display Section 54, the special view 2 reserve display unit 55, and the common view reserve display unit 56).

In addition, the batch display device 50 has a high probability display unit 57 and a time saving state for notifying that the probability state of big hit is high probability state from power-on of the gaming machine 1 to the occurrence of the first big hit. The game state display unit consisting of a short time state display unit 58 that lights up when it occurs to notify the occurrence of a short time state, and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening and closing rounds of the first special fluctuation winning device 41 and the second special fluctuation winning device 42 The number-of-rounds display part 59 which displays is provided.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1, and the details of the common view change display game and the special view change display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 1, a game is played by launching a game ball from the ball firing unit 13 toward the game area 31. The shot game balls run down the game area 31 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 31, and the common view start gate 3
6, the general winning opening 40, the first start winning opening 37, the second starting winning opening 38, the first special variation winning device 41 or the second special variation winning device 42 or is provided at the bottom of the game area 31 It flows into the out port 43 and is discharged from the game area 31. Then, the general winning opening 40, the first starting winning opening 37, the second starting winning opening 38, the first special variation winning device 41 or the second special variation winning device 4
When the gaming ball is won in 2, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening that has won is paid out unit 642
Through the top plate 11a.

The general drawing start gate 36 detects the gaming ball that has passed through the general drawing start gate 36 (see FIGS. 31 and 43) and the gaming board through the flange portion 36b while supporting the gate switch 603. A gate member (support member) 36a (see FIG. 31) attached to the main body (game board 32) is provided. When the gaming ball passes the common view starting gate 36,
A gate switch 603 is detected, and a common drawing variation display game is executed.

In a state in which the common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, when the common drawing fluctuation display game is already performed and the common drawing fluctuation display game is not finished, or the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit. 2) When the game ball passes through the common drawing start gate 36 when the start winning opening 38 is converted to the open state, if the common drawing reservation display number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

A hit determination random number value is stored in the hit map start memory to determine hit hit of the hit game variation display game, and when the hit judgment random number value matches the decision value, the hit map change display is performed. The game is hit and a specific result aspect (specific result) is derived.

The common drawing variation display game is executed by the common drawing indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The common drawing indicator 53 is composed of an LED which indicates a hit in the case of the lighting state as normal identification information (general drawing), and shows a deviation in the case of the light-off state, and this LED blinks to indicate fluctuation of the normal identification information. The display is performed, and the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed.

When the common drawing random number value extracted at the time of passing the common drawing start gate 36 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the common drawing display 53 is stopped in the hit state and is brought into the hit state. At this time, the movable member 38a is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the common voltage solenoid 27 (see FIG. 43), and the game ball to the second start winning opening 38 is Prize winning is allowed.

The winning of the first starting winning opening 37 and the winning of the second starting winning opening 38 are detected by the first starting opening switch 601 (see FIG. 43) and the second starting opening switch 602 (see FIG. 43). Ru. The game ball that has won in the first start winning opening 37 is detected as the start winning ball in the special view 1 variation display game, and is stored within the predetermined upper limit number, and the game ball winning in the second start winning opening 38 is It is detected as a start winning ball of the special view 2 variation display game, and is stored within a predetermined upper limit number.

When detecting the start winning balls of the special view variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted. These random numbers are each stored as a special figure start winning memory area in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 600 for a predetermined number of times (for example, at a maximum of eight times).
Is stored to the limit. The number of storages of the special view start winning memory is displayed on the special view 1 hold display unit 54 or the special view 2 hold display unit 55 for notifying the start win number of the collective display unit 50, and the display unit 35a of the variable display unit 35. It is also displayed on a display 480 as a sub display described later.

The game control device 600 executes the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 based on the winning or the first start storage on the first start winning opening 37. In addition, game control control equipment 600,
Based on the winning on the second start winning opening 38 or the second start memory, the special view 2 variation display game is executed by the special view 2 display 52.

The special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are performed by variably displaying identification information on the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. Further, in the variation display device 35, a decorative special view variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special view variation display game is executed.

In the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display device 35, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. mentioned above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special) The variable display (scroll display) is started in the order of the symbols), and the symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped to display the result of the special view change display game. Further, in the variable display device 35, various effects such as appearance of characters are displayed to improve interest.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special figure fluctuation display game As a result of the above, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived by the display symbol, and becomes a big hit state (special game state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the variable display device 35 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

After that, the special gaming state occurs and the first special variation winning device 41 and the second special variation winning device 4
Big winning opening solenoid 28a provided in 2 and big winning opening solenoid 28b (see FIG. 43)
When the power is turned on, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the first special variation winning device 41 and the second special variation winning device 42 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of gaming balls win, and during this time the player takes many gaming balls. It has the benefit of being able to be earned.

In the present embodiment, there are cases in which the number-of-rounds determination game (auxiliary game) to be described later is performed or not performed between the time when the special result mode is derived and the time when the special game state occurs. You may unify to one side. In addition, special figure 1 indicator 51 and special figure 2 indicator 52
May be configured as separate displays or may be configured as the same display, but are set so that each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time.

With regard to the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the fluctuation display device 35, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same. It may be executed on the display device or the display area. In this case, the special-figure variation display game corresponding to the special-figure 1 variation display game and the special-figure 2 variation display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. The special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there are special figure 1 variation display games and start figures of the special figure 2 variation display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed. The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in the order in which the starting memory is stored.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the player performs a left or right strike according to the gaming state. The display unit 35a of the variable display device 35 displays a left-handed or right-handed instruction so that the player can easily make a break according to the game state.

[Center case]
Next, the center case 34 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3, 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the center case 34. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the distributing device 90 disposed in the center case 34, and FIG. 7B is a front view of the distributing device 90 installed in the center case 34.

As shown in FIG. 6, the center case (front component) 34 is configured as a transparent ring-shaped (frame-shaped) frame. The center case 34 has a fitting portion 34b fitted in an opening 32e (see FIG. 4) formed in the game board 32 of the game board 30, and a hook portion 34c formed in a hook shape with respect to the fitting portion 34b. And a guide portion 34d on which the game ball can roll. The center case 34 is disposed in the game area 31 on the front side of the bowl portion 34 c.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, at the upper left portion of the center case 34, a second special variation winning device 42 is provided. The second special variation winning device 42 is a pivoting unit 4 for opening and closing the second big winning opening.
2a, a special winning opening solenoid 28b for turning the turning portion 42a, and an upper count switch 606 as a count sensor for detecting a winning on the second large winning opening of the gaming ball. The gaming ball that has won the second special variation winning device 42 is guided to the back side of the gaming board through the winning ball channel 44.

The special winning opening solenoid 28 b is fixed to the back of the center case 34. A decoration plate 34e is provided on the front of the center case 34 at the mounting position of the big winning opening solenoid 28b. The decorative plate 34e is a member that hides the special winning opening solenoid 28b. The center case 34 is almost entirely formed as a transparent member, but by providing the decorative plate 34e, it is possible to prevent the big winning opening solenoid 28b from being viewed from the front, and the appearance is not lost. In addition, the decorative plate 34e may be transparent, and a decorative seal may be attached to the front surface of the decorative plate 34e to restrict the visual recognition of the big winning opening solenoid 28b from the front.

Below the center case 34, there is a stage unit 100 having a rolling surface 101 on which the game balls can roll, a warp passage 110 for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 31 to the stage unit 100, and a rendering device unit A cover member 120 for restricting the inflow of gaming balls into the inside of the component member 200 is provided. The stage portion 100, the warp passage 110 and the cover member 120 are configured as transparent members.

The warp passage 110 is disposed at the lower left portion of the center case 34. The warp passage 110 has a receiving portion 111 capable of receiving gaming balls having flowed down the game area 31 on the left side of the center case 34 and a gaming ball having passed the receiving portion 111 at the left end of the rolling surface 101 of the stage portion 100. And a guiding unit 112 for guiding. The receiving unit 111 is a center case 34.
Is opened obliquely upward to the left so that the game ball having flowed down the left side can be easily received. The guiding portion 112 is in the form of a passage that opens on the back surface, but the opening on the back surface is closed by the cover member 120.

The stage unit 100 is disposed at the lower center of the center case 34. Stage unit 100
Is provided extending in the left-right direction, and includes a rolling surface 101 on which the gaming ball can roll. Stage unit 100
A cover member 120 is provided at the rear of the frame.

The rolling surface 101 of the stage portion 100 is formed in a wave shape in which the left and right end portions and the central portion are high. A first guide portion 102 is provided at a central portion of the rolling surface 101 and is inclined downward toward the rear, and a second guiding portion 102 is inclined downward toward the rolling surface 101 at both left and right sides of the first guide portion 102. A guide unit 103 is provided.

The cover member 120 has an upstanding wall portion 121 which is erected upward from the rear end portion of the rolling surface 101;
It is comprised from the return wall part 122 turned back toward the front from the upper end of the standing wall part 121 so that the rolling surface 101 may be opposed. The game ball rolling on the rolling surface 101 by the standing wall portion 121 and the turning wall portion 122 of the cover member 120 is a variable display device 35 (rendering device unit 200
Can be prevented from flowing into the

Further, since the folded wall portion 122 is formed such that the tip thereof protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the stage portion 100, the game ball collides with an obstacle nail or the like in the game area 31 or the like below the stage portion 100 Even if it bounces up, it is bounced back to the game area 31 side by the return wall part 122. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball jumping up from the game area 31 from entering the variable display device 35 (rendering device unit 200) side.

An opening 121 a formed at a position corresponding to the first guide 102 in the upstanding wall 121 of the cover member 120, and a series communicating with the opening 121 a and the outlet 104 opened in the lower front of the stage 100. A passage 121b (see FIG. 6) is formed. The gaming balls having flowed into the communication path 121 b from the first guiding portion 102 through the opening 121 a are guided to the lower side of the rolling surface 101 and discharged from the outlet 104 into the gaming area 31.

After the game ball guided from the warp passage 110 to the stage unit 100 rolls on the rolling surface 101, is it discharged from the first guide unit 102 through the communication passage 121b to the game area 31 from the outlet 104? Or, it is discharged from the second guiding part 103 to the game area 31. Stage unit 100
The outlet 104 of the second guide portion 103 is formed immediately above the first start winning hole 37.
Is shifted to the left and right sides of the first start winning opening 37 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 6), so the game ball discharged from the outlet 104 is discharged from the second guiding portion 103 First than a sphere
The probability of being guided to the start winning hole 37 increases.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, in the upper right portion of the center case 34, a sorting space (sorting space portion) 34f is formed, into which gaming balls rolled on the guide portion 34d of the center case 34 flow. In the distribution space 34f, a first passing gate 34g (a first specific area, a lottery gate) and a second passing gate 34h (a second specific area, a fixed gate) through which game balls can pass are disposed. ing. The gaming balls having flowed into the sorting space 34f are sorted by the sorting device 90,
It passes through the first pass gate unit 34g or the second pass gate unit 34h. The distribution device 90 is a device that switches the flow-down route of the game ball. In addition, character decoration of "variation" is given to the front of 1st passage gate part 34g, and character decoration of "fixed" is given to the front of 2nd passage gate part 34h.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7A, the distribution apparatus 90 includes a fixed base 91 fixed to the back surface of the center case 34, a rotary motor 92 fixed in the fixed base 91, and a rotary motor 92. And a switching unit 93 which is driven to rotate and switches the flow-down route of the game ball.

The switching portion 93 is a substantially cylindrical member, and includes a protrusion 93 a that protrudes in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface. The switching portion 93 is accommodated in the distribution space 34 f of the center case 34, and is disposed rotatably with respect to the front surface of the center case 34.

The rotation motor 92 is attached to the fixed base 91, and the rotation shaft 92 of the rotation motor 92 is
The disk portion 96 is fixed to a. A protruding shaft 96a that protrudes forward at the center of the disk portion 96
Is formed, and a shaft portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the switching portion 93 is fixed to the protruding shaft 96a. Therefore, the driving force of the rotary motor 92 is transmitted to the switching portion 93 via the disc portion 96.

The disc portion 96 is provided with a cutout portion 96 b penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the disc portion 96 having the cutout portion 96 b and the photo sensor 97 disposed in the fixed base 91 detect the initial position of the switching portion 93. Ru.

The photo sensor 97 includes a groove portion through which the disk portion 96 can pass, and a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion disposed so as to straddle the groove portion. The light emitting unit of the photo sensor 97 emits light (infrared light) toward the light receiving unit. Whether this light is blocked by the disc 96 or
It is determined whether it is a light passing state in which light is allowed to pass through the notch 96b of the disk portion 96, and in the light passing state, it is determined that the switching portion 93 is at the initial position. The rotational position of the switching unit 93 can be detected by the number of steps of the rotary motor 92 from the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 7 (B), by providing the switching portion 93 in the center case 34, in the distribution space 34f, a first guideway for guiding the gaming ball to the first passing gate portion 34g. A second induction passage 95 for guiding the gaming ball to the second passage gate unit 34h is formed.

When the switching unit 93 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount in FIG. 7B by the rotary motor 92, the projection 93a of the switching unit 93 closes the upstream portion of the second guide path 95, and flows into the distribution space 34f. The ball is guided to the first passage gate 34g through the first induction passage 94. On the other hand, when the switching unit 93 is rotated by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in FIG. 7B by the rotary motor 92, the projection 93a of the switching unit 93 blocks the upstream portion of the first guide path 94, and the distribution space 34f The game balls that flow in are guided to the second passage gate unit 34 h through the second induction passage 95. The gaming balls having passed through the first passing gate portion 34g and the second passing gate portion 34h are discharged to the game area 31 on the right side of the center case 34 through the discharge passage 98 formed in the lower part of the distribution space 34f.

The first passing gate unit 34g is provided with a first passing detection sensor 607a for detecting that the gaming ball has passed through the first passing gate unit 34g, and the second passing gate unit 34h has a second playing ball. A second passage detection sensor 607 b is provided to detect passage through the passage gate portion 34 h.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7A, in the fixed base 91 of the distribution device 90, two LEs are provided.
D substrates 99a and 99c are accommodated.

A plurality of (five) LEDs 99 b are provided along the first guide path 94 and the second guide path 95 on the front surface of the LED substrate 99 a. By causing the LED 99 b to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, a light emission effect is performed such that the first induction passage 94 and the second induction passage 95 are illuminated.

The LED substrate 99c is disposed below the LED substrate 99a. On the front surface of the LED substrate 99c, four LEDs 99d are provided in a row along the discharge passage 98, and below the three LEDs 99e used for notification effect described later are provided in a row.

In the center case 34 in front of the notification LED 99e of the LED board 99c, each notification LED
Lens members 61 to 63 are attached corresponding to 99e. The front of the lens member 61 disposed on the left is decorated with the character of "variation", and the lens member 6 disposed on the right is
The front of 3 is decorated with the letters "fixed". The lens member 62 at the center is "Aim"
The letters are decorated.

By causing the notification LED 99e of the LED substrate 99c to emit light in accordance with the gaming state, the notification effect via the above-described lens members 61 to 63 is performed. Details of the notification effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 104 to 105. In addition, depending on the gaming state of the LED board 99c LE
By causing D99 d to emit light, an emission effect such that the discharge passage 98 is emitted is performed.

In the gaming machine 1, the LED 99b of the LED substrate 99a and the LED of the LED substrate 99c
Although a lens member is not provided in front of 99d, a lens member may be provided if necessary.

[Rendering device unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 4 and FIG. 8, the rendering device unit (back surface component member) 200 will be described. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the effect device unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The effect device unit 200 is a unit base member 210 fixed to the back of the game board 30.
And the back side effect device 300 accommodated in the unit base member 210, the lower effect device 220
, The upper decoration unit 240, and the lower decoration unit 260. An upper rendering device 400 and a right portion rendering device 500 are attached to the upper decoration unit 240.

The unit base member 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the unit base member 210. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the unit base member 210 includes a back wall 211 and a back wall 2.
A frame body is constituted by a side wall 212 which is erected forward from the outer peripheral edge 11 and is configured to be able to accommodate various devices and the like.

The game board 32 of the game board 30 of the game machine 1 is made of resin, and the thickness of the game board 32 is thinner than that of a conventional wooden game board. In the gaming machine 1, the spacer member 213 is integrally formed on the front end of the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210 in order to compensate for the reduced thickness of the gaming board 32 (even if the spacer member 213 is attached as a separate member). Good). If the thickness in the front-rear direction when the unit base member 210 is installed on the game board 32 is thin, it becomes difficult to fix by engagement with the front frame 5, but the unit base member 210 has a thickness in the front-rear direction Since the spacer member 213 is provided, the thickness in the front-rear direction when the unit base member 210 is installed on the game board 32 becomes equal to that in the prior art, and the front frame 5 can be engaged (properly stored).

A notch 213 is formed in the spacer member 213 located at the upper right corner of the unit base member 210.
a is formed. The cutout portion 213a is required for the grounding process of the game board 30, and is disposed at a position corresponding to the static elimination unit 900 (see FIG. 3).

In the gaming machine 1, the spacer member 213 is a side wall 212 of the unit base member 210.
Although it is formed in the shape of a frame along the direction, it may be formed only at the four corner portions on the left, right, upper and lower sides of the unit base member 210. Further, since the spacer member 213 is visible through the transparent game board 32, a decorative sheet or a decorative seal may be attached to the front surface of the spacer member 213 to enhance the decorativeness.

The upper portion of the back wall 211 of the unit base member 210 is recessed rearward. A space surrounded by the upper portion of the back wall 211 and the side wall 212 is an upper accommodation space 214 for accommodating the back side rendering apparatus 300 and the upper decoration unit 240, and a space surrounded by the lower portion of the back wall 211 and the side wall 212. The lower effect device 220 and the lower decoration unit 2
60 is a lower accommodation space 215 for accommodating 60.

As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 9, the display unit 70 having the variable display device 35 is disposed on the back of the upper part of the unit base member 210, and the game control device is on the back of the lower part of the unit base 210 A main control unit 80 having 600 is arranged.

A window 216 is formed in an upper portion of the back wall 211 at a position corresponding to the display 35 a of the variable display device 35. The display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 can be viewed through the window unit 216.

In addition, four relay boards electrically connected to the game control device 600 and various devices are attached to the back surface of the lower portion of the back wall 211. On the back wall 211, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 9, surrounding walls that respectively surround the four relay boards are formed. The surrounding wall is a wall member that stands up rearward from the back surface of the back wall 211.

A lower decoration unit 260 is mounted on a side wall 212 located at the lower part of the unit base member 210.
An opening 217 is formed to allow the game ball to be led to the lower side of the game board 30 through the. Further, on the side wall 212 of the curved surface located on the left side of the unit base member 210, wiring openings 212a and 212b are formed, through which the wiring of the electric components disposed on the game board 30 is passed. Details of the wiring process of the electric component will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Further, the spacer member 213 located at the lower right portion of the unit base member 210 is provided with a storage portion 218 for storing the drawer connector substrate 219, and the back wall of the storage portion is provided with a drawer connector behind the gaming board. An opening for facing is formed. A drawer connector substrate (not shown) is also provided at the lower right portion of the storage portion 5a provided in the inner frame 5,
When the game board 30 is stored in the storage unit 5a, the drawer connectors of the game board 30 and the inner frame 5 are connected to each other. By connecting two drawer connectors, various
Game control device 600, effect control device 700 and the like, and various electric components (power supply device 60) on the inner frame 5 side
0, the discharge control device 640, etc.) can be electrically connected. When a wire harness is used to connect the electrical parts, wiring and the like are complicated, but since the game machine 1 uses the drawer connector substrate, the connection work can be simplified.

[Lower production device]
Next, the lower effect device 220 will be described with reference to FIG. 8, FIG. 10 and FIG. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the lower effect device 220. As shown in FIG. FIG. 11A is a back view of the movable portion of the lower effect device 220, and FIG. 11B is a perspective view of the lower effect device 220.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, the lower effect device 220 has a flat fixed base 221, and
A cover member 222 attached to the front surface of the fixed base 221, a movable decorative member 223 accommodated in the accommodation space between the fixed base 221 and the cover member 222 so as to be vertically movable, and a drive motor for driving the movable decorative member 223 And 230.

The fixed base 221 is a substantially rectangular plate member, and is fixed to the lower back wall 211 (see FIG. 9) of the unit base member 210.

The cover member 222 is a lid member attached to the fixed base 221 so as to cover the front surface of the fixed base 221. An accommodation space capable of accommodating various members is formed between the cover member 222 and the fixed base 221.

The cover member 222 has a housing recess 222 a for housing the decorative body 224 of the movable decorative member 223 when the movable decorative member 223 described later is at the lower limit position (initial position). In addition, the upper surface wall 222b of the cover member 222 is decorated with characters, and the front wall 222c of the cover member 222 is formed with a wiring opening 222d for passing electric wiring connected to the drive motor 230 and the like. There is.

The movable decorative member 223 includes a decorative body 224 and a slide plate 225 fixed to the back surface of the decorative body 224, and is configured to be vertically movable between a lower limit position (initial position) and an upper limit position.

The decorative body 224 is a disk-like member, and the front surface of the decorative body 224 is decorated with characters. An LED substrate may be disposed inside the decorative body 224, and the decorative body 224 may emit light using an LED provided on the LED substrate.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11A, the slide plate 225 is a plate-like member extending in the vertical direction. The upper portion of the slide plate 225 is fixed to the back surface of the decorative body 224, and the lower portion of the slide plate 225 is configured to extend downward from the decorative body 224. The slide plate 225 is slidably attached in the vertical direction to a guide member 226 fixed at the center of the front surface of the fixed base 221. The guide member 226 extends in the vertical direction, and the cross-sectional shape of the guide member 226 is formed in a U-shape.

When the slide plate 225 is attached to the guide member 226, the rear end side of the slide plate 225 is inserted into the guide member 226, and the front end side of the slide plate 225 is the guide member 226.
It is exposed without being inserted inside. A rack gear 225a is formed on the right side of the slide plate 225 exposed in this manner, extending in the vertical direction.

The drive motor 230 is a drive source that moves the movable decorative member 223 up and down. Drive motor 2
30 is fixed to the back surface of the cover member 222 such that the output shaft 231 is directed rearward. The main driving gear 232 is fixed to the output shaft 231 of the drive motor 230.

The main driving gear 232 meshes with a first driven gear 233 rotatably supported by a first shaft 221 a which is formed to protrude from the fixed base 221. The first driven gear 233 meshes with a second driven gear 234 rotatably supported by a second shaft 221 b formed to project from the fixed base 221. The second driven gear 234 meshes with the rack gear 225 a of the slide plate 225 of the movable decorative member 223.

In the lower effect device 220 configured as described above, the movable decorative member 2 is
The controller 23 is controlled to move up and down between the lower limit position and the upper limit position.

As shown in FIG. 8, when the effect by the lower effect device 220 is not executed, the drive motor 230 is stopped, and the movable decorative member 223 is located at the lower limit position. Thus, when the movable decorative member 223 is in the lower limit position, the decorative body 224 is a cover member 120 (
It is located at the rear of FIG.

A substantially U-shaped photosensor 235 is disposed on the fixed base 221, and the lower end of the slide plate 225 of the movable decorative member 223 is a concave portion of the photosensor 235 when the movable decorative member 223 is at the lower limit position. It is inserted in the light source to block the light emitted from the photo sensor 235. Therefore, it is possible to detect whether or not the movable decorative member 223 is at the lower limit position (initial position) by detecting whether the photosensor 235 is in the light passing state or in the light blocking state.

When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and the predetermined gaming state is reached, the drive motor 230
Is driven to rotate in the forward direction, and the driving force of the drive motor 230 is transmitted to the slide plate 225 via the gears 233, 234, and 235. As a result, as shown in FIG.
Ascends, and the movable decorative member 223 ascends to the upper limit position. Thus, the movable decorative member 223
Ascends to the upper limit position, the entire decoration 224 becomes visible by the player.

Thereafter, the drive motor 230 is reversely driven, and the slide plate 225 is lowered, whereby the movable decorative member 223 returns from the upper limit position to the initial position. Note that by alternately repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation of the drive motor 230, it is also possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the movable decorative member 223 up and down.

[Backside production device]
Next, the back side rendering device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 12 to 15. Figure 1
2 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect device 300. FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the left shutter unit 330 of the back-side effect device 300. As shown in FIG. FIG. 14 shows the shutter unit 330 on the left side.
It is a figure explaining rotation operation | movement of the rotation door 340 of. FIG. 15 shows the shutter unit 33 on the left side.
It is a figure explaining slide operation of 0. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 12, the back side rendering device 300 includes a frame-shaped base frame 310, a cover frame 320 attached to the front side of the base frame 310, a base frame 310, and a cover frame 3.
20 and a pair of shutter units 3 slidably disposed in the left and right direction.
And a drive unit 360 for driving the shutter units 330.

The base frame 310 is a flat frame, and the back wall 211 of the unit base member 210.
It is fixed at the top of the The base frame 310 includes an opening 311 at a position corresponding to the window 216 of the unit base member 210, which allows the display 35a of the variable display device 35 to be visible.

The cover frame 320 is a frame formed to correspond to the shape of the base frame 310, and is fixed to the base frame 310 so as to cover the front surface of the base frame 310. The cover frame 320 is located at a position corresponding to the window 216 of the unit base member 210.
And an opening 321 for making it visible.

As shown in FIG. 12, a pair of shutter units 330 is provided between the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320. These shutter units 330 are configured to slide in the lateral direction between a position (initial position) lateral to the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35 and a position (central position) ahead of the display unit 35 a It is done. Therefore, the space in which the shutter unit 330 is accommodated is set to the side of the display unit 35a of the variable display device 35, and the standby area where the shutter unit 330 stands by and the shutter unit 330 is set ahead of the display unit 35a. It is divided into an effect area to operate.

In addition, between the upper portion of the base frame 310 and the upper portion of the cover frame 320, the shutter unit 3 is
An arrangement space for arranging a drive unit 360 for driving 30 is formed. This arrangement space communicates with the space (the standby area and the effect area) in which the shutter unit 330 is accommodated.

The pair of shutter units 330 is disposed separately in the left-right direction. The left shutter unit 330 and the right shutter unit 330 are configured to be laterally symmetrical. Since these shutter units 330 are members that perform the same function, the configuration of the left shutter unit 330 will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration of the right shutter unit 330 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 13, the shutter unit 330 on the left side is rotatably provided with respect to the slide member 331, the decoration member 334 attached to the front surface of the slide member 331, and the slide member 331 and the decoration member 334. A door 340 and a drive motor 350 for rotationally driving the pivoting door 340 are provided.

The slide member 331 is a substantially U-shaped member in a front view, and the drive motor 35 is disposed on the upper front surface.
An accommodation recess 331 a for accommodating 0 is provided.

The upper end surface of the slide member 331 is formed with a mounting portion 332 which is slidably attached to a guide rod 322 (see FIGS. 12 and 15) horizontally fixed to the upper surface of the back surface of the cover frame 320. A bearing hole 332 a is formed through the mounting portion 332 in the left-right direction, and the guide rod 322 is inserted into the bearing hole 332 a of the mounting portion 332.

An endless belt 3 of a drive unit 360, which will be described later, is provided on the upper end surface of the block-shaped attachment portion 332.
A belt fixing portion 333 fixed to 75 is formed. A through hole 333a is formed in the belt fixing portion 333 in the left-right direction, and the belt fixing portion 333 is attached to the endless belt 375 through the through hole 333a.

The decoration member 334 is a member provided so as to cover the front surface of the slide member 331, and the front surface of the decoration member 334 is decorated such as by plating. When the decoration member 334 is installed on the slide member 331, the drive motor 350 is concealed by the decoration member 334.

The upper portions of the slide member 331 and the decoration member 334 are formed as an upper projecting portion 330a (see FIG. 12) projecting toward the other shutter unit 330 side, and the lower portions of the slide member 331 and the decoration member 334 are the other. It is formed as a lower side projecting portion 330 b (see FIG. 12) projecting toward the shutter unit 330 side. When the two left and right shutter units 330 move to the center position, the upper protrusion 330a and the lower protrusion 330b of the left shutter unit 330, and the upper protrusion 330a and the lower protrusion 330b of the right shutter unit 330. And face each other (close) by opening a minute gap.

The pivoting door 340 is a movable member that pivots with respect to the slide member 331 and the decoration member 334. The pivoting door 340 is fixed to the first base 341 and the second side of the first base 341.
L disposed in the housing space between the base 342 and the first base 341 and the second base 342
And an ED substrate 343.

The first base 341 is a substantially rectangular translucent member, and character decoration is applied to the surface (see FIG. 14A). An upper turning shaft 34 protruding upward at the upper right end face of the first base 341
1a is formed, and at the lower right end surface of the first base 341, a lower pivot shaft 34 which protrudes downward is formed.
1b is formed.

The second base 342 fixed to the back surface of the first base 341 is a substantially rectangular translucent member, and character decoration is provided on the surface (see FIG. 14B). A pair of upper and lower magnetic members is accommodated on the front surface of the second base 342 near the side opposite to the side on which the upper pivot shaft 341a and the lower pivot shaft 341b of the first base 341 are provided. A portion 342a is formed.
The magnetic body 344 is accommodated in the magnetic body accommodation portion 342a.

The LED substrate 343 is fixed to the back surface of the first base 341 in the accommodation space between the first base 341 and the second base 342. The LED substrate 343 is a plurality of LEDs 343a
And are disposed on the first base 341 such that the LEDs 343a are in the horizontal orientation. The LED 343a is a common light source that causes the front and back surfaces (the first base 341 and the second base 342) of the pivoting door 340 to emit light simultaneously. As described above, by causing the front surface and the back surface of the pivoting door 340 to simultaneously emit light, it becomes possible to perform light emission using the entire pivoting door 340,
The presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, the number of parts is reduced as compared with the case where the LEDs for emitting light on the front and back surfaces of the pivoting door 340 are separately provided.

The pivoting door 340 has the slide member 331 and the decoration member 334 by inserting the upper rotation shaft 341a and the lower rotation shaft 341b into a pair of bearing holes 334a formed in the upper and lower portions of the decoration member 334, respectively. It is rotatable relative to the Upper rotation shaft 3 of the rotation door 340
41a is connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 350 via the connection member 351.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is not executed, the drive motor 350 is stopped, and the surface of the first base 341 becomes the front surface of the rotation door 340. , And the character decoration provided on the surface of the first base 341 is visible. On the other hand, when the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is executed, the drive motor 350 is driven, as shown in FIG.
As shown in B), the surface of the second base 342 becomes the front of the pivoting door 340, and the second base 34
The character decoration applied to the surface of 2 becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 15, a drive unit 360 for driving the pair of shutter units 330 is accommodated in an arrangement space between the upper portion of the base frame 310 and the upper portion of the cover frame 320. The drive unit 360 is a left drive mechanism 3 for driving the shutter unit 330 on the left side.
And a right drive mechanism 380 for driving the right shutter unit 330.

The left drive mechanism 370 includes a drive motor 371 fixed to an upper portion of the back surface of the cover frame 320 so that the output shaft faces rearward, and a main drive pulley 372 fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 371
The driven pulley 372 includes two driven pulleys 373, 374 disposed on the left and right sides of the main driving pulley 372, and an endless belt 375 wound around the pulleys 372, 373, 374.

The driven pulley 373 is provided on the left side of the drive motor 371 and is pivotally supported to the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320 via fixed shafts 361 whose ends are fixed. Further, the driven pulley 374 is provided on the right side of the drive motor 371, and the base frame 310
And the cover frame 320 is pivotally supported via fixed shafts 362 whose ends are fixed.

A belt fixing portion 333 of the left shutter unit 330 is fixed to an endless belt 375 positioned between the driven pulleys 373 and 374.

On the other hand, the right side drive mechanism 380 has a drive motor 381 fixed to the upper front of the base frame 310 so that the output shaft faces the front, and a main drive pulley 38 fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 381
2 and two driven pulleys 383 and 384 disposed on the left and right sides of the main driving pulley 382 and an endless belt 385 wound around the pulleys 382, 383 and 384.

The driven pulley 383 is provided on the left side of the drive motor 381, and the left drive mechanism 37.
It is pivotally supported via a fixed shaft 362 that pivotally supports the zero driven pulley 374. Thus, the fixed shaft 362 is a common shaft that supports both the driven pulleys 374 and 383. Also,
The driven pulley 384 is provided on the right side of the drive motor 381 and is pivotally supported by a fixed shaft 363 whose ends are fixed to the base frame 310 and the cover frame 320, respectively.

A belt fixing portion 333 of the right shutter unit 330 is fixed to an endless belt 385 positioned between the driven pulleys 383 and 384.

When the effect by the back side effect device 300 is not executed, the drive motors 371 and 381 of the drive unit 360 are stopped, and the left and right shutter units 330 are positioned at the initial position (standby position) in the standby area. There is. As described above, when the shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the shutter unit 330 is located behind the upper decoration unit 240 (see FIG. 8), so that almost the entire shutter unit 330 is hardly visible. There is. Since the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed in front of the shutter unit 330, in the shutter unit 330 which is stopped in the standby area, the rotation effect by the rotation door 340 is impossible. That is, the standby area is set to a width (longitudinal width) in which the pivoting door 340 of the shutter unit 330 can not pivot.

A substantially U-shaped photo sensor 335 (see FIG. 12) is disposed on the left side of the cover frame 320, and when the left shutter unit 330 is in the initial position, the slide member 331 of the shutter unit 330 is A light shielding plate 331b (see FIG. 15) formed on the left end face is
The light is inserted into the recess of the photo sensor 335 to block the light emitted from the photo sensor 335. Therefore, by detecting whether the photosensor 335 is in the light passing state or in the light blocking state, it can be detected whether the left shutter unit 330 is at the initial position.

Further, a substantially U-shaped photosensor 336 (see FIG. 12) is disposed on the right side of the cover frame 320, and when the shutter unit 330 on the right side is in the initial position, A light shielding plate 331b (see FIG. 12) formed on the right end face is
The light is inserted into the recess of the photo sensor 336 to block the light emitted from the photo sensor 336. Therefore, by detecting whether the photosensor 336 is in the light passing state or in the light blocking state, it can be detected whether or not the right shutter unit 330 is at the initial position.

When the game proceeds in the gaming machine 1 and the predetermined gaming state is reached, the drive unit 36 is
The zero drive motor 371 is reversely driven, and the endless belt 375 rotates so that the left shutter unit 330 moves from the initial position to the right. At this time, the drive motor 381 of the drive unit 360 is driven to rotate forward, and the endless belt 385 rotates so that the right shutter unit 330 moves leftward from the initial position. As a result, as shown in FIG. 15, the left and right shutter units 330 slide along the guide rods 322 from the standby area to the rendering area in front of the display unit 35 a of the variable display device 35.

In the lower end surface of the slide member 331 of each shutter unit 330, projecting pieces 331c are formed so as to protrude downward, and each projecting piece 331c is formed between the lower portion of the base frame 310 and the lower portion of the cover frame 320. It is slidably inserted into a guide groove (not shown). The upper portion of the shutter unit 330 is guided along the guide rod 322 via the attachment portion 332, and the lower portion of the shutter unit 330 is guided along the guide groove via the projecting piece 331c, so that the shutter unit 330 slides smoothly. It can be moved.

When the shutter unit 330 moves from the initial position in the standby area to the central position in the effect area, almost the entire shutter unit 330 can be viewed by the player. In the effect area, a member that prevents the pivoting operation of the pivoting door 340 is not disposed in front of the shutter unit 330, and the pivoting operation of the pivoting door 340 is possible. That is, the effect area is set to a width (longitudinal width) in which the pivoting door 340 of the shutter unit 330 can pivot.

In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sliding door 340 of each shutter unit 330 is pivoted after sliding the left and right shutter units 330 from the initial position in the standby area to the central position in the effect area. By controlling the rendering operation in this manner, the space such as the standby area and the rendering area around the variable display device 35 can be efficiently utilized, and the rendering effect by the back-side rendering device 300 can be enhanced.

Further, the shutter unit 330 is configured to slide in the lateral direction in the effect area from the standby area, and the pivoting door 340 provided in the shutter unit 330 is turned using space in the front-rear direction of the effect area Since it is comprised in one, it can implement | achieve different presentation operation | movement in one back side presentation apparatus 300, and it becomes possible to heighten the presentation effect of the back side presentation apparatus 300 more. In addition, space saving around the standby area can be achieved.

Since the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed in front of the standby area of the shutter unit 330, the decorativeness in the periphery of the standby area can be enhanced. In the present embodiment, the upper decoration unit 240 is disposed in front of the shutter unit 330 in the standby area. However, the upper decoration unit is disposed in the rear of the shutter unit 330 in the standby area (back surface of the standby area). A decorative member such as 240 may be provided. In this case, when the shutter unit 330 moves from the standby area, the decorative member is in a visible state.

In the rear-side effect device 300, an arrangement space for arranging the drive unit 360 is formed between the upper portion of the base frame 310 and the upper portion of the cover frame 320, and the shutter unit 330 operates in this arrangement space. It is configured to communicate with the space (waiting area and effect area). When the drive unit 360 is driven, the movement of the endless belts 375 and 385 and the shutter units 330 causes the air in the installation space of the drive unit 360 and the shutter unit 3 to move.
30 is agitated with the air in the space where
The heat of 71, 381 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress failure or malfunction of the electric drive sources such as the drive motors 371, 381 and the like.

[Lower decoration unit]
Next, the lower decoration unit 260 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 16 to 20.

FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the lower decoration unit 260. As shown in FIG. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the intermediate member 290 which constitutes the lower decoration unit 260. As shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the decorative member 270 attached to the intermediate member 290. As shown in FIG. FIG. 19A is a front view enlarging a part of the lower decoration unit 260, and FIG. 19B is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the lower decoration unit 260 taken along the B-B plane of FIG. FIG. 20 shows the flow path constituting member 2 constituting the lower decoration unit 260.
FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the lower decoration unit 260 is accommodated in the lower accommodation space 215 of the unit base member 210 in a state of being disposed in front of the lower effect device 220. The lower decoration unit 260 functions as a member for decorating the lower part of the game area 31, and also functions as a member for guiding the game ball winning a winning opening etc. to the ball collection opening 5c (see FIG. 2) of the front frame 5. The game balls collected from the ball collection port 5c of the front frame 5 are guided to the outside of the game machine 1 through a guide path (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 16, the lower decorative unit 260 is disposed on the flow path component 280, the intermediate member 290 disposed on the front surface of the flow channel component 280, and the front face of the intermediate member 290. An LED substrate 261 and a decoration member 270 disposed to cover the front surface of the intermediate member 290
And.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the intermediate member 290 is a substantially rectangular plate member. The middle member 290 guides the game ball that has won the first special fluctuation winning device 41 and the first induction rod 291 that guides the game ball that has won the first start winning hole 37 and the second start winning hole 38. Induction 樋 2
92 and a guiding path 293 for guiding the gaming ball that has won the general winning opening 40.

The first guiding rod 291 is formed in the central portion of the intermediate member 290, corresponding to the first start winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 provided in the game area 31 (see FIG. 3). The first guiding rod 291 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The first guiding rod 291 guides the gaming ball having won in the first starting winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 from the front of the intermediate member 290 to the rear.

The second induction rod 292 is formed on the right side of the first induction rod 291 corresponding to the first special change winning device 41 provided in the game area 31. The second guiding rod 292 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The second guiding rod 292 guides the gaming ball that has won the first special variation winning device 41 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

The guiding path 293 is formed corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 40 provided in the game area 31. Three guiding paths 293 are provided on the left side of the first guiding bar 291, and one guiding path 293 is provided on the right side of the second guiding bar 292. The guiding path 293 is a game ball rolling path extending in the front-rear direction, and is formed to penetrate the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction. The guiding path 293 guides the gaming ball having won in the general winning opening 40 from the front to the rear of the intermediate member 290.

The intermediate member 290 also has three mounting holes 294 (see FIG. 16) for mounting the magnetic sensor 23. The mounting holes 294 are holes penetrating the intermediate member 290 in the front-rear direction, and the three mounting holes 294 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. The magnetic sensor 23 is inserted into the mounting hole 294 from the back side of the intermediate member 290 and fixed to the intermediate member 290. In the state of being fixed to the intermediate member 290, the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 is the intermediate member 29.
Project to the front of 0.

The LED substrate 261 is fixed to the front surface of the intermediate member 290. The LED substrate 261 includes a plurality of LEDs 261 a for emitting light forward and a first induction rod 2 of the intermediate member 290.
91, five openings 261b for passing the second induction weir 292 and the induction path 293, and three passage holes 261c for passing the magnetic sensor 23.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the decorative member 270 is a translucent member having a substantially rectangular plate shape, and
On the front surface of the decorative member 270, various decorations such as character decoration are provided. The decorative member 270 is L
The intermediate member 290 is attached to cover the ED substrate 261. Lower decoration unit 260
Is included in the gaming machine 1, the decorative member 270 of the lower decorative unit 260 is located behind the cover member 120 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), and the upper half of the decorative member 270 is transparent. It becomes visible through 120 and the game board 32.

The decoration member 270 includes a crucible accommodating portion 271 for accommodating the first induction weir 291 of the intermediate member 290,
A through hole 272 through which the second guide rod 292 passes, and a through hole 273 through which the guide passage 293 passes.
And.

The crucible accommodating portion 271 is formed in the central portion of the decorative member 270. In the state where the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the first guiding rod 2 of the intermediate member 290 is inserted into the crucible accommodating portion 271.
91 is accommodated. A through hole 271a is formed on the front side wall of the bowl housing portion 271 for receiving the game balls winning the first start winning hole 37 and the second start winning hole 38 in the bowl housing portion 271.

Further, in the state where the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the second of the intermediate member 290 is
The guide rods 292 project forward of the decorative member 270 through the through holes 272, and the guide paths 293 of the intermediate member 290 project forward of the decorative member 270 through the through holes 273.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, the above-described decoration member 270 further includes a magnetic sensor housing portion 274 housing the magnetic sensor 23 and a radio wave sensor housing portion 276 housing the radio wave sensor 24.

The radio wave sensor housing portion 276 is provided at the lower left portion of the decorative member 270. Radio wave sensor 2
4 are attached in the radio wave sensor housing portion 276.

The magnetic sensor housings 274 are arranged corresponding to the three magnetic sensors 23 fixed to the intermediate member 290. The three magnetic sensor housings 274 are provided at the upper front of the decoration member 270 and at positions where they can be viewed by the player via the game board 32.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and has an insertion hole 274a into which the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 is inserted. .
Therefore, when the decorative member 270 is installed on the intermediate member 290, the tip portion of the magnetic sensor 23 fixed to the intermediate member 290 is inserted into the insertion hole 27 of the magnetic sensor accommodating portion 274 of the decorative member 270.
It is inserted in 4a. The magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 detects magnetism within a predetermined range around the game area 31 in which the magnetic sensor 23 is disposed.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, at the upper front of the decoration member 270, the outer shape of the magnetic sensor storage portion 274 is the same as the outer shape of the magnetic sensor storage portion 274 at a position where it can be viewed by the player through the game board 32. Two dummy accommodating portions 275 are provided. The dummy housing portion 275 is disposed at a position outside the magnetic detection range (or within the magnetic detection range) of the magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 274. By providing the dummy accommodating portion 275 in the decoration member 270 in this manner, it is possible to increase the deterrence against magnetic irregularities without increasing the number of magnetic sensors 23.

Although two dummy accommodating portions 275 are formed in the decorative member 270, the dummy accommodating portion 27 is
The number of 5 is arbitrarily determined as needed.

In the lower decorative unit 260 configured as described above, the gaming balls that have won the first start winning opening 37 and the second starting winning opening 38 are intermediate members through the through holes 271 a and the first guiding rod 291 from the front of the decorative member 270 The gaming ball guided to the rear of 290 and winning the first special variable winning device 41 is guided to the rear of the intermediate member 290 from the front of the decorative member 270 through the second guiding rod 292. In addition, the gaming balls having won in each general winning opening 40 are guided from the front of the decorative member 270 to the rear of the intermediate member 290 through the guide paths 293. The gaming balls thus guided to the rear of the intermediate member 290 flow into the various flow channels on the front side of the flow channel component 280.

As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 20, the flow path component member 280 is fixed to the back surface of the intermediate member 290, and forms a frame that forms various flow channels between the back surface of the intermediate member 290 and the front surface of the flow path component member 280. It is a body.

The channel component 280 has a start winning hole channel 281 for guiding the gaming balls introduced from the first induction bar 291 downward, and a first large winning opening for guiding the gaming balls inflowing from the second induction bar 292 downward. A channel 282 and a general winning opening channel 283 for guiding the gaming balls introduced from the three induction channels 293 on the left downward, and a general winning opening for guiding the gaming balls inflowing from the one guidance channel 293 on the right to the lower The flow path 284 and the second large winning opening flow path 285 for guiding the gaming balls that have won the second special variation winning device 42 downward, and the combined flow path 2 where the game balls flowing down from these flow paths 281 to 285 merge
And 86.

The start winning hole channel 281 is formed in the front center of the channel component 280. An upstream portion of the start winning hole channel 281 communicates with the first induction rod 291, and a downstream portion of the start winning hole channel 281 communicates with the combined channel 286. The game ball which has flowed in from the first induction rod 291 is the start winning opening channel 28
1 is led to the combined channel 286.

The first large winning opening channel 282 is formed in the channel component 280 on the right side of the start winning opening channel 281. The upstream portion of the first large winning opening channel 282 is in communication with the second induction rod 292, and the downstream portion of the first large winning opening channel 282 is in communication with the combined channel 286. The gaming balls having flowed in from the second guiding rod 292 flow down the first large winning opening channel 282 and are guided to the combined channel 286.

The general winning opening channel 283 is formed in the channel component 280 on the left side of the starting winning opening channel 281. The upstream portion of the general winning hole flow path 283 is branched into three flow paths, and these three flow paths communicate with the three guide paths 293, respectively. The downstream part of the general winning hole flow path 283 is one flow path in which three upstream flow paths gather, and communicates with the combined flow path 286. The game balls having flowed in from the three induction paths 293 on the left flow down the general winning hole flow path 283 and are merged into the combined flow path 28.
It is led to 6. At the exit portion of the general winning opening channel 283, a winning opening switch 604a is provided for detecting that the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 40.

The general winning opening channel 284 is formed in the channel component 280 on the right side of the first large winning opening channel 282. The upstream portion of the general winning hole channel 284 is in communication with the right guide channel 293, and the downstream portion of the general winning hole channel 284 is in communication with the combined channel 286. The gaming balls having flowed in from the right guiding path 293 flow down the general winning hole flow path 284 and are led to the combined flow path 286. General winning hole channel 284
In the exit part of the game, a winning opening switch 604 for detecting that the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 40
b is provided.

The second winning opening channel 285 is formed in the channel component 280 on the left side of the general winning opening channel 283. The upstream portion of the second large winning opening channel 285 communicates with the downstream end of the winning ball flow channel 44 (see FIGS. 6 and 21) which causes the second special variation winning device 42 to flow down the winning game ball, and the second large The downstream portion of the winning hole flow path 285 communicates with the combined flow path 286. The game balls having flowed in from the winning ball flow channel 44 flow down the second large winning opening flow channel 285 and are led to the combined flow channel 286.

The combined channel 286 is provided at the lower part of the front surface of the channel component 280, and is formed so as to roll the inflowing game ball to the front of the gaming machine 1. The gaming balls rolled on the combined channel 286 are collected through the opening 217 formed in the unit base member 210 through the ball recovery port 5c of the front frame 5 (FIG. 2).
And to the outside of the gaming machine 1 through a guiding path (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 20, the flow path forming member 280 has a wiring opening 287 for leading the electric wiring of various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 23 to the outside.

In the lower decorative unit 260 described above, the magnetic sensor 23 is fixed to the intermediate member 290, and the magnetic sensor housing portion 274 for housing the magnetic sensor 23 is provided in the decorative member 270. It may be disposed between the plate 32. In addition, the radio wave sensor 24 may be disposed between the decoration member 270 and the game board 32 instead of being disposed in the radio wave sensor housing portion 276 of the decoration member 270.

[Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 240 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 21. Figure 21.
These are the disassembled perspective views of the upper decoration unit 240. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 21, the upper decoration unit 240 is accommodated in the upper accommodation space 214 of the unit base member 210 in a state of being disposed in front of the back side rendering device 300.

The upper decorative unit 240 is a left decorative portion 241 extending in the vertical direction along the left side edge of the display portion 35 a of the variable display device 35, and a right decorative portion extending in the vertical direction along the right side edge of the display portion 35 a And 242 an upper decorative portion 243 extending in the left-right direction along the upper edge of the display portion 35a. The upper decoration unit 240 is substantially U-shaped in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 21, the left decoration portion 241 includes the game area 3 on the left side including the drawing start gate 36.
It is arranged behind 1 (see FIG. 3). On the back surface of the left decorative portion 241, a winning ball flow channel 44 is attached, which allows the game ball that has won the second special variation winning device 42 to flow down.

The winning ball flow path 44 is connected to the upstream side flow path 44a guiding the gaming ball that has won the second special variation winning device 42 in the left and right direction, and the downstream side flow connected to the upstream side flow path 44a to guide the gaming ball downward Road 4
And 4b.

The downstream channel 44 b of the winning ball channel 44 is fixed to the back surface of the left decorative portion 241, and the downstream channel 4 b
The upstream side flow path 44a connected to the upper part of 4b is extended to the right side of the left decoration part 241 through the notch part 241a of the left decoration part 241. The upstream flow passage 44a is disposed along the lower surface of the upper decorative portion 243, and the upstream end of the upstream flow passage 44a is connected to the winning ball flow passage 44 provided in the center case (front component) 34, The gaming ball that has won the prize flows into the second big winning opening of the special variation winning device 42. Further, the downstream end of the downstream side flow passage 44b of the winning ball flow passage 44 is connected to the upstream portion of the second large winning opening flow passage 285 (see FIG. 20) of the lower decorative unit 260 described above.

A magnetic sensor housing portion 241 b for housing the magnetic sensor 23 is formed in the left decorative portion 241 located behind the common view starting gate 36. The magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b detects the magnetism around the common view starting gate 36 (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, the special winning opening solenoid 28b of the second special variation winning device 42 (FIG. 32).
A dummy accommodating portion 243 b having the same outer shape as the magnetic sensor accommodating portion 241 b is provided in the upper decorative portion 243 near the position where the reference is disposed. The dummy housing portion 243 b is disposed at a position outside the magnetic detection range (or within the magnetic detection range) of the magnetic sensor 23 housed in the magnetic sensor housing portion 241 b. If a magnetic sensor is arranged around the special winning opening solenoid 28b, the magnetic sensor may detect the magnetic force when the solenoid is driven, and the determination of the magnetic irregularity may be erroneous. Therefore, in the vicinity of the special winning opening solenoid 28b, not the magnetic sensor housing portion for housing the magnetic sensor, but the dummy housing portion 243b is disposed to suppress the magnetic injustice with respect to the second special fluctuation winning device 42. In the vicinity of the special winning opening solenoid 28b, a magnetic sensor whose detection accuracy is lowered to such an extent that the magnetic force from the special winning opening solenoid 28b is not detected may be arranged.

The left decorative portion 241, the right decorative portion 242, and the upper decorative portion 243 are light transmitting members, and a single LED substrate 244 is fixed to the back surface of the decorative portions 241, 242, 243. LED
On the front surface of the substrate 244, a plurality of LEDs 244a for emitting light to the left decorative portion 241, the right decorative portion 242, and the upper decorative portion 243 are provided.

In addition, a mounting recess 24 for mounting the upper rendering device 400 on the front surface of the upper decoration portion 243
3a is formed, and a mounting recess 242a for mounting the right part rendering device 500 is formed on the front surface of the right decoration part 242.

When the upper rendering device 400 is installed in the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decoration portion 243, the upper rendering device 400 is in the opening (display window) 34 a of the center case 34 and the display of the variable display device 35. It is located above the portion 35a (see FIG. 3). In addition, in a state where the right part rendering device 500 is installed in the mounting recess 242 a of the right decorative part 242, the right portion rendering device 5 is
00 is in the opening (display window) 34 a of the center case 34 and the variable display 35
Is located on the right side of the display unit 35a (see FIG. 3).

[Upper production device]
Next, the upper effect device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 25B.

FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the upper effect device 400. As shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a light guide plate 470 which constitutes the movable display unit 450 of the upper effect device 400. As shown in FIG. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the upper effect device 400. As shown in FIG. 25A shows the movable display unit 450 of the upper rendering device 400.
And a perspective view of the drive mechanism 440. FIG. FIG. 25B is a back view of the upper effect device 400 with the fixed base 420 removed.

As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, the upper rendering device 400 includes the mounting recess 2 of the upper decorative portion 243.
It comprises an upper fixed unit 410 fixed to 43a, and a movable display unit 450 disposed on the front of the upper fixed unit 410 so as to be vertically movable.

As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the movable display unit 450 includes a mounting base 460 to which various members are attached, a light guide plate 470 disposed in front of the mounting base 460, and a light guide plate 47.
And a cover member 490 attached to the mounting base 460 so as to surround the periphery of various members.

The mounting base 460 is a flat member, and on the upper and lower portions of the front surface of the mounting base 460, wall portions 461 erected forward are formed. The pair of upper and lower wall portions 461 extends in the left-right direction, and the lower surface of the upper wall portion 461 and the upper surface of the lower wall portion 461 are disposed to face each other. An engagement groove 461a in which the upper portion of the light guide plate 470 can be engaged with the lower surface of the upper wall portion 461
In the upper surface of the lower wall portion 461, an engaging groove 461a engageable with the lower end of the light guide plate 470 is formed in the left-right direction. The light guide plate 470 is supported by the upper and lower wall portions 461 by engaging with the engagement grooves 461 a.

The light guide plate 470 is a light-transmissive plate member, and a pattern groove in which the characters “big chance !!” is formed is formed in the light guide plate 470. The light guide plate 470 is configured such that when the light from the LED 462 a of the LED substrate 462 disposed on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 470 is received, the pattern grooves are displayed by light emission.

The two LED substrates 462 are spaced apart in the left-right direction on the front surface of the mounting base 460. A pair of left and right substrate support portions 463 are formed on the mounting base 460, and the LED substrates 462 are respectively attached to the left and right substrate support portions 463. Substrate support 463 on the left side
The LED 462a of the LED substrate 462 supported on the right side is disposed rightward to irradiate light to the left end face of the light guide plate 470, and the LE of the LED substrate 462 supported by the right substrate support portion 463
D 462 a is disposed leftward to irradiate light to the right end face of the light guide plate 470.

Four LEDs 462a are arranged in a line in the upper and lower rows on the left LED board 462, and three LEDs 462a are arranged in a line in the upper and lower rows on the LED board 462 on the right. Each LED 462a of the left LED substrate 462 and each LED 4 of the right LED substrate 462
62a are vertically shifted so as to be different in the vertical position. With such an LED arrangement, it is possible to uniformly illuminate the light guide plate 470 as a whole.

As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 24, the display 480 is a rectangular EL display, and is a transmissive display device in which the light guide plate 470 disposed behind can be viewed in the non-display state.
The indicator 480 is mounted in the cover member 490. The display 480 is positioned in front of the light guide plate 470 by attaching the cover member 490 provided with the display 480 to the mounting base 460.

The cover member 490 is a translucent frame member, and the front surface of the cover member 490 is formed with a window portion 491 for making the indicator 480 visible.

Referring to FIGS. 22, 24 and 25A, upper fixing unit 41 of upper rendering device 400.
0 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 22, 24 and 25A, the upper fixing unit 410 has a fixing base 4.
20, a decorative cover member 430 attached to the front of the fixed base 420, and a drive mechanism 440 disposed in the accommodation space between the fixed base 420 and the decorative cover member 430 and driving the movable display unit 450.

The fixed base 420 is a flat member, and is fixed to the mounting recess 243 a of the upper decorative portion 243. An attachment portion 421 for attaching the drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is formed on the front surface of the fixed base 420.

The decorative cover member 430 is a cover member that surrounds the drive mechanism 440 and is fixed to the fixed base 420. On the front surface of the decorative cover member 430, the letters "Land", "Sea" and "Sky" are decorated, and the three letter decorations are arranged side by side in a line in the left-right direction. When the movable display unit 450 is positioned in front of the upper fixed unit 410, these character decorations are hidden by the movable display unit 450 and become invisible.
When it is lowered, it becomes visible.

The drive mechanism 440 includes a drive motor 441 as a drive source, a disk-shaped cam link 442 fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 441, and a slider 443 linked with the cam link 442.
And.

The slider 443 is a flat member extending in the left-right direction. The slider 443 is
A long hole 443 penetrating the slider 443 in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction
have a. The link pin 442a of the cam link 442 is slidably inserted into the long hole 443a of the slider 443. The link pin 442 a is fixed to the front surface of the cam link 442 at a position offset from the rotation center of the cam link 442.

The connection pins 443b protruding forward are provided at the left and right ends of the slider 443 and guide grooves 431 are formed in the decorative cover member 430 to allow the connection pins 443b of the slider 443 to pass in the front-rear direction. The two guide grooves 431 extend slightly at an angle to the vertical direction, and are arranged in parallel in a state of being separated in the horizontal direction. With the slider 443 disposed on the decorative cover member 430, the connecting pin 443 b of the slider 443 protrudes forward of the decorative cover member 430 through the guide groove 431. Coupling pin 4
The mounting base 460 of the movable display unit 450 is fixed to the protruding portion 43b. As described above, the movable display unit 450 is supported via the connection pin 443 b of the slider 443.

The decorative cover member 430 between the two guide grooves 431 is provided with a slider 44.
A central guide groove 432 is provided in which a guide pin 464 (see FIGS. 25A and 25B) protruding on the front face of 3 is slidably inserted. The central guide groove 432 is formed in parallel with the guide groove 431.

As shown in FIG. 25B, when the effect by the upper effect device 400 is not executed,
The drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is stopped, and the link pin 44 of the cam link 442
2a is located at the top position. At this time, the movable display unit 450 supported by the connection pin 443 b of the slider 443 is stopped at the front position (initial position) of the upper fixed unit 410. When the movable display unit 450 is stopped at the initial position, the character decoration of the decoration cover member 430 of the upper fixed unit 410 is in an invisible state.

When the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and the predetermined gaming state is achieved, the drive motor 441 of the drive mechanism 440 is driven to rotate forward, and the link pin 442a of the cam link 442 turns clockwise in FIG. 25B. . When the link pin 442 a turns and slides from the uppermost position while sliding on the long hole 443 a of the slider 443, the slider 443 also descends according to the position of the link pin 442 a. As a result, the movable display unit 450 supported by the connection pin 443 b of the slider 443 is lowered relative to the upper fixed unit 410. At this time, the guide pins 464 of the mounting base 460 of the movable display unit 450 move downward along the central guide groove 432 of the decorative cover member 430.

When link pin 442a pivots from the uppermost position to the lowermost position, movable display unit 450
Is lowered from the initial position to the lower limit position, and the character decoration of the decorative cover member 430 of the upper fixed unit 410 becomes visible. Thereafter, when the drive motor 441 is driven to rotate in the forward direction so that the link pin 442a turns from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, the movable display unit 450 is raised to the initial position.

The upper effect device 400 includes a position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the slider 443. Based on this position detection sensor, it is determined whether the movable display unit 450 is at the initial position or at the lower limit position. Be done. Also, in the upper effect device 400, the drive motor 4
By alternately repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation of 41, it is also possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the movable display unit 450 up and down.

[Right part production device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, FIG. 26-FIG. 28B, the right part presentation apparatus 500 is demonstrated.

FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the right-side effect device 500. FIG. 27 is a longitudinal sectional perspective view of the right-side effect device 500. As shown in FIG. FIG. 28A is a perspective view of the movable decoration unit 550 and the drive mechanism 540 of the right portion presentation device 500. FIG. FIG. 28B is a back view of right portion presentation device 500 in a state where fixed base 520 is removed.

As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 26, the right-side effect device 500 includes the mounting recess 2 of the right decorative portion 242.
It comprises a side fixing unit 510 fixed to 42 a and a movable decoration unit 550 disposed slidably in the lateral direction with respect to the side fixing unit 510.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the movable decoration unit 550 is a side fixing unit 510.
A mounting base 560 disposed in front of the housing, a decorative member 570 fixed to the front of the mounting base 560, a rotary cylinder 580 rotatably provided relative to the decorative member 570, and a decorative member 57
And a pair of infrared sensors (human sensors) 590 attached to the lower part of 0.

The mounting base 560 is a flat member, and the front surface of the mounting base 560 is a decorative member 570.
Is attached.

The decoration member 570 is a box-like member. An opening 571 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in a central portion of the decorative member 570, and the rotary cylinder 580 is disposed to be positioned in the opening 571. The upper end of the rotating cylinder 580 is formed as a closed end, and the lower end of the rotating cylinder 580 is formed as an open end.

A motor housing portion 572 housing a drive motor 551 for rotating the rotary cylinder 580 is formed at the top of the decoration member 570, and a sensor housing portion 573 housing the infrared sensor 590 is formed at the bottom of the decoration member 570. ing.

When the drive motor 551 is accommodated in the motor accommodation portion 572, the output shaft of the drive motor 551 faces downward. The closed end (upper end) of the rotary cylinder 580 is fixed to the lower end of the output shaft of the drive motor 551.

Further, the LED substrate 552 inserted into the rotary cylinder 580 through the opening end of the rotary cylinder 580 is fixed to the opening 571 of the decorative member 570. The surface of the LED substrate 552 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 552 a for emitting light from the rotating cylinder 580.

The infrared sensor 590 is a non-contact type human sensor that detects that a part of the player's body or the like has entered the detection range. The detection range of the infrared sensor 590 will be described later with reference to FIG. In the sensor housing portion 573 of the decorative member 570, two infrared sensors 590 are disposed adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side fixing unit 510 has a fixing base 520, a decorative cover member 530 attached to the front of the fixing base 520, and a housing space between the fixing base 520 and the decorative cover member 530. And a drive mechanism 540 for driving the movable decoration unit 550.

The fixed base 520 is a flat member and is fixed to the mounting recess 242 a of the right decoration part 242. An attachment portion 521 for attaching the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is formed on the front surface of the fixed base 520.

The decorative cover member 530 is a cover member that surrounds the drive mechanism 540 and is fixed to the fixed base 520. The front face of the decorative cover member 530 is decorated with the text "Hold by hand". In this character decoration, the movable decoration unit 550 is a side fixed unit 510.
When the movable decorative unit 550 is slid in the left direction, the movable decorative unit 550 becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 28A, the drive mechanism 540 includes a drive motor 54 as a drive source.
1, a disc-shaped cam link 542 fixed to the output shaft of the drive motor 541, and a slider 543 linked to the cam link 542.

The slider 543 is a flat member extending in the vertical direction. The slider 543 is
A long hole 543 penetrating the slider 543 in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction
have a. The link pin 542a of the cam link 542 is slidably inserted into the long hole 543a of the slider 543. The link pin 542 a is fixed to the front surface of the cam link 542 at a position offset from the rotation center of the cam link 542.

Guide pins 543 b protruding forward are provided at upper and lower end portions of the slider 543, and guide grooves 531 in which the guide pins 543 b of the slider 543 slidably engage are formed in the decorative cover member 530. There is. The two guide grooves 531 extend in the left-right direction, and are horizontally disposed in a state of being separated in the up-down direction. Slider 543
The guide pin 543 b slides along the guide groove 531 to slide in the left-right direction.

A pair of upper and lower connecting bosses 561 (see FIG. 28A) connected to the slider 543 is formed on the back surface of the mounting base 560 of the movable decorative unit 550.
The movable decoration unit 550 including the mounting base 560 is fixed to the slider 543 via 61. The decorative cover member 530 is formed with a guide groove 532 that allows the connection bosses 561 of the mounting base 560 to pass in the front-rear direction. The two guide grooves 532 extend in the left-right direction, and are horizontally arranged in a state of being vertically separated inside the two guide grooves 531. The movable decoration unit 550 slides in the left-right direction as the connection boss 561 slides along the guide groove 532.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the effect by the right-side effect device 500 is not executed, the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is stopped, and the link pin 542 of the cam link 542 is stopped.
a is located at the rightmost limit position to the right. At this time, the movable decoration unit 550 supported by the slider 543 is stopped at the front position (initial position) of the side fixing unit 510. When the movable decoration unit 550 is stopped at the initial position, the character decoration of the decoration cover member 530 of the side fixing unit 510 is not visible.

As shown in FIG. 28B, when the game progresses in the gaming machine 1 and a predetermined gaming state is achieved, the drive motor 541 of the drive mechanism 540 is driven to rotate forward, and the link pin 542a of the cam link 542 is shown in FIG. 28B. In the clockwise direction. When the link pin 542a turns and moves to the left from the right limited position while sliding on the long hole 543a of the slider 543, the slider 543 also moves to the left according to the position of the link pin 542a. Thereby, the connection boss 561 connected to the slider 543 moves along the guide groove 532, and the movable decoration unit 550 slides in the left direction with respect to the side fixing unit 510.

When link pin 542a pivots from the right limit position to the left limit position, movable decoration unit 550
Slides from the initial position to the left limit position on the left side, and the character decoration of the decorative cover member 530 of the side fixing unit 510 becomes visible. Thereafter, when the drive motor 541 is reversely driven so that the link pin 542a pivots from the left limit position to the right limit position, the movable decoration unit 550 slides to the initial position.

The right-side effect device 500 is configured to rotate the rotary cylinder 580 by the drive motor 551 when the movable decoration unit 550 is located at the left limited position and the infrared sensor 590 is in the detection state. At this time, a light emission effect using the LED 552a of the LED substrate 552 is also performed.

The right-side effect device 500 is provided with a position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the slider 543. Based on this position detection sensor, whether the movable decoration unit 550 is at the initial position or at the left limit position Is determined. Further, in the right-side effect device 500, the drive motor 5 is
By alternately repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation of 41, it is also possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the movable decoration unit 550 to the left and right.

[Wire routing structure]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33, the wiring arrangement structure of the electric components (here, the common view starting gate 36 and the second special fluctuation winning device 42) arranged on the game board 32 will be described.
As described above, the game board 32 according to the first embodiment of this invention is a transparent member which can be seen through the back. Therefore, the effect device unit 200 disposed in the decoration space between the game board 30 and the rear unit base member 210 (that is, the space formed by the above-mentioned upper accommodation space 214 and lower accommodation space 215) It functions as a three-dimensional decoration member that is visually recognized by the person and produces a decoration effect. In addition, since wiring of electrical components disposed on the game board 30 and routed around the back of the game board 32 can also be viewed by the player, wiring processing that does not disturb the decoration of the three-dimensional decorative member is desired.

FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the upper decorative unit 240 according to the first embodiment of this invention. Figure 3
The upper decoration unit 24 is attached with the game board 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention.
It is an upper left enlarged perspective view of 0. FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the common view starting gate (the gate switch 603 corresponds to a specific electrical component) 36 in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 32 is an enlarged view of the periphery of the special winning opening solenoid 28 b and the upper count switch 606 (corresponding to a normal electric component) in FIG. 30 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 33 is a rear perspective view of the vicinity of the common view starting gate 36 in FIG. 30 of the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the upper decoration unit 240 for decorating the peripheral edges of the left and right sides and the upper part of the main display device (variable display device) 35 in a substantially U shape in front view includes a left decoration portion 241 and a right decoration portion It is comprised by 242 and the upper decoration part 243. FIG. Note that FIG. 29 is the same as the diagram included in FIG. 21 described above.

Since the distribution device 90 (see FIG. 3) of the center case 34 is disposed above the right decorative portion 242 at the junction with the upper decorative portion 243, the wiring of each sensor provided in the distribution device 90 is A wiring opening 242 b for routing around the back surface side of the upper decorative unit 240 is provided.

The mounting recess 243 a of the upper decoration portion 243 is provided with a wiring opening 243 c for routing the wiring of the upper rendering device 400 (see FIG. 8) to the back surface side of the upper decoration unit 240.
In the upper decoration portion 243, an upper front decoration member 245 is provided behind the second special variation winning device 42 (see FIG. 30). And, on the front surface of the upper front decorative member 245, a wiring opening 245a for drawing the wiring of the second special variation winning device 42 to the back surface side of the upper decorative unit 240 is provided.

Here, the wiring arrangement structure of the second special variation winning device 42 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 32, in a state where the game board 30 is attached, a second special variation winning device 42 provided in the game area 31 is disposed in front of the upper front decoration member 245. In the second special variation winning device 42, the game ball can be won in the second large winning opening by the operation of the turning portion 42a by the large winning opening solenoid 28b. The second big winning opening is provided with an upper count switch 606 for detecting a winning game ball. The game ball that has won the second big winning opening is the winning ball channel 44
Led to Then, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the wiring W2 of the big winning opening solenoid 28b and the upper count switch 606 is a wiring opening 245 located behind the turning portion 42a.
a is drawn out of the decoration space from the wiring opening 212b on the back surface side of the unit base member 210 through a wiring lead-out path (not shown) formed inside the three-dimensional decoration member such as the upper front surface decoration member 245 . In this manner, the upper front decorative member 245 functions as a shielding decorative portion that shields the wiring W2 from being exposed behind the gaming board 32 and also has a decorative effect, and further internally wiring the wiring W2 from the wiring opening 245a on the front surface It also functions as a wire lead-out part for drawing in and drawing out on the back side.

Thus, the second special variation winning device 42 is closer to the center of the game board 32 (upper decoration unit 24
When arranged at the center of 0), the wiring W2 of the second special variation winning device 42 is routed to the back side of the three-dimensional decoration member via a wiring lead-out path provided inside the three-dimensional decoration member at the rear, Lead out of the As a result, the wiring distance can be short and efficient wiring processing can be performed compared to the structure in which the wiring W2 is routed to the front through the front of the upper decorative unit 240, and the decrease in appearance and visibility behind the gaming board 32 is suppressed. can do. At this time, the wiring W2 is provided so as to protrude from the upper decorative portion 243 of the upper decorative unit 240.
It is drawn in from five. Thus, the upper decorative unit 240 is provided to project forward of the upper decorative portion 243 (second decorative portion) of the base housed in the decorative space, and the upper front decorative member 245 which approaches or abuts on the back surface of the game board 32. (1st decoration part) is provided. Upper decoration part 2
A wiring opening 245a is provided in the upper front decoration member 245 closer to the game board 32 than 43.
Since the wiring W2 is drawn into the interior from the wiring opening 245a, the amount of exposure of the wiring W2 behind the gaming board 32 can be reduced, and a reduction in the appearance of the gaming board behind can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 29, 30, and 32, above the upper front decoration member 245,
Dummy housing part 243 that looks as if housing the magnetic sensor 23 for detecting fraudulent activity
b is provided. Such a dummy accommodating portion 243b is provided at a place where there is not much fraudulent activity or a place which responds to a device having another magnetism (for example, the second special fluctuation winning device 42). The player can not determine the presence or absence of the magnetic sensor 23. By providing the dummy accommodating portion 243 b in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that many magnetic sensors 23 are installed, and therefore, an effect of giving up fraud is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 29, a side front decorative portion 246 is provided in a projecting manner on the front surface of the left decorative portion 241. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the side front decoration 246 is located behind the common view starting gate 36 so that the wiring W1 of the gate switch 603, which is drawn from the back of the game board 32 to the decoration space, passes forward. Will be placed on Specifically, the wiring W1 of the gate switch 603 passes through the rear of the flange portion 36b of the gate member 36a and the front of the side front face decoration portion 246 and is routed to the end thereof. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33, the wire W1 is drawn out from the wiring opening 212a formed in the front and rear direction in the side wall 212 of the unit base member 210 to the outside of the decoration space and is wired along the wiring opening 212a. It is led to the back side of the unit base member 210.
The unit base member 210 also functions as a wire lead-out portion that leads the wire W1 through the wire opening 212a to the outside of the decoration space.

Here, the side front decorative portion 246 is colored so as to have the same color as the wiring W1. As a result, the wiring W1 passing in front of the side front decoration 246 becomes inconspicuous.
It is possible to suppress the decrease in the appearance of the rear of the second and the visibility of the side front face decoration portion 246. Note that
By providing a stripe pattern or a cut in the same direction as the wiring W1 routing direction (here, the left-right direction) in the side front decoration portion 246, the same effect can be obtained even if the wiring W1 has or does not become similar color You may do so.

Thus, when the common view start gate 36 is disposed closer to the end of the game board 32 (the end of the decoration space), the wiring W1 of the common view start gate 36 should be placed in front of the upper decorative unit 240 behind. It passes through to the end and is led out of the decoration space through the wiring opening 212a provided on the side. At this time, since it is not necessary to form a wire lead-out portion on the front surface of the upper decorative unit 240 (the area where the player can visually recognize through the game board 32), it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the upper decorative unit 240 from being deteriorated. .

Further, in front of the special winning opening solenoid 28b of the second special variation winning device 42 described above, a decorative plate (shielding plate) 34e (see FIG. 6) for shielding the special winning opening solenoid 28b is provided. The decorative plate 34e regulates that the special winning opening solenoid 28b can be directly viewed by the player, and the appearance of the area around the second special variation winning device 42 can be prevented from being impaired. In addition, since the wiring of the big winning opening solenoid 28b passes through the rear of the decorative plate 34e and is then led to the wiring opening 245a, the large winning opening solenoid 2 is made by the decorative plate 34e.
It becomes difficult to visually recognize the wiring of 8b. Further, since the gate switch 603 of the common view start gate 36 is in a state in which the front side is covered by the gate member 36 a (see FIG. 31), the gate member 36 a functions as a member that shields the gate switch 603. This regulates that the gate switch 603 can be directly viewed by the player.
6. It is possible to prevent the beauty of the surroundings from being impaired. Furthermore, since the wiring of the gate switch 603 passes behind the flange portion 36b provided on the gate member 36a, the wiring of the gate switch 603 becomes difficult to visually recognize by the flange portion 36b.

As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the wiring W1 of the common view starting gate 36 (the second electric component) near the end of the game area 31 (the decoration space) is the upper decoration unit 240 (three-dimensional decoration member)
While being drawn out of the decoration space by being drawn along the wiring opening 212a of the unit base member 210, the second special fluctuation winning device 42 (further from the end of the game area 31) The wiring W2 of the first electric component) is led out of the decoration space through the wiring opening 245a of the upper decoration unit 240 through the inside. The wires W1 and W2 drawn out of the decoration space (the back side of the unit base member 210) are connected to the game control device 600. As described above, since the wiring routing structure is applied according to the arrangement of the electrical components, efficient wiring processing is possible.

Note that, as shown in FIGS.
The shape of 1b is the same as that of the dummy accommodating portion 243b. The magnetic sensor housing portion 241 b is
A magnetic sensor 23 for detecting fraudulent acts is actually accommodated. As described above, by providing the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b and the dummy housing portion 243b which can not be distinguished at first glance in the game area 31, and providing the magnetic sensor 23 at a portion where the occurrence rate of fraud is high, fraudulently Discovery and prevention can be done. In the first embodiment of the present invention, the magnetic sensor housing portion 241b and the dummy housing portion 243b are disposed in the left decorative portion 241 and the upper decorative portion 243 (that is, the upper decorative unit 240), respectively. It may be disposed on the game board 32 side.

[Discharge unit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. 40, the static elimination unit 900 for releasing the static electricity charged on the transparent resin game board 32 to the frame (here, the glass frame 6) side will be described. As described above, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the reinforcing sheet metal 6b (see FIG. 2) is provided on the back surface of the glass frame 6, and the charge removing unit 900 (FIG. 3 and FIG. Reference) is provided. Then, in a state in which the game board 30 is stored in the frame (the opening and closing frame 4) consisting of the glass frame 6 and the front frame 5, the metal conductive member 901 provided in the static elimination unit 900 contacts the reinforcing sheet metal 6b of the glass frame 6. Ground it by letting it go. The mechanism will be described below.

FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the mounting state of the static elimination unit 900 provided on the game board 30 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 35 shows the charge removal unit 90 according to the first embodiment of this invention.
It is a perspective exploded view of 0. FIG. 36 is a back perspective view of the static elimination unit 900 according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 37 shows the charge removal unit 9 in FIG. 34 of the first embodiment of the present invention.
It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows 00. FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 are longitudinal sectional views showing an operation aspect of the static elimination unit 900 when stored in the frame (opening and closing frame 4) of the first embodiment of this invention.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 39, above the right side of the game board 30, there is formed an attaching part 902 for attaching the static elimination unit 900 by the dividing member 32b on the front face of the game board 32. The static elimination unit 900 has a screw hole 903 opened on the front surface, and after being attached to the attachment portion 902,
Screws 904 are passed through screw holes 903 and fixed to the game board 32. Notches 32f and 213a are formed below the fastening position of the screw 904 in the game board 32 and the spacer member 213 of the unit base member 210 located behind the attachment portion 902, respectively. These notches 32
When the game board 30 is stored in the front frame 5, the f, 213a is formed so as to allow insertion of the projecting pressing portion 5d (see FIG. 38) provided on the front frame 5.

Here, the static elimination unit 900 includes a base member 907 having a housing space forming portion 905 and a rail conductive portion 906, a conductive member 901 capable of contacting the reinforcing sheet metal 6b of the glass frame 6, and a conductive member capable of contacting the guide rail 32a. And 908. The guide rails 32a may be attached directly to the game board 32, or may be attached to the partitioning member 32b. The point is that how to attach to the game board 32 can be arbitrarily set as long as the charged static electricity can be collected on the launched game ball or game board.

The base member 907 has a box shape with an open rear surface, and the accommodation space forming portion 905 forms an accommodation space 905a capable of accommodating the conductive member 901 from the open rear surface. In addition, the rail conductive portion 906 is a guide rail 3 that divides the game area 31 on the side surface of the accommodation space forming portion 905.
It is provided protruding so as to be in contact with 2a. Here, an L-shaped conductive member 908 is attached to the rear surface of the rail conductive portion 906. The end of the rail conductive portion 906 is provided with a plug-in portion 906a into which the conductive member 908 and the guide rail 32a can be inserted, and the contact portion of the conductive member 908 inserted into the plug-in portion 906a as shown in FIG. 908a and guide rail 32a
The static electricity charged on the game board 30 is made to flow to the conduction member 908 of the static elimination unit 900 through the guide rails 32a by contacting the. At the other end of the conductive member 908, a fixed portion 908b fixed to the game board 32 together with the base member 907 and the conductive member 901 by the screw 904 is provided, and the guide rail 32a contacts the contact portion 908a. The static electricity that has flowed to the conductive member 908 is flowed to the conductive member 901 via the fixed portion 908 b.

The upper end portion of the conductive member 901 is in contact with the fixed portion 908b of the conducting member 908 on the front surface and in contact with the gaming board 32 on the rear surface, and the gaming member 32 by the screw 904 together with the base member 907 and the conducting member 908 as described above. There is provided a fixed portion 901a fixed to the Further, a pressure receiving portion 901b is provided below the fixed portion 901a. As shown in FIG. 37, the game board 3
In a state in which 0 is not attached to the front frame 5, the pressure receiving portion 901 b protrudes and faces the notch 32 f of the game board 32. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, in a state where the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5, the press receiving portion 901b is pushed forward by the projecting pressing portion 5d of the front frame 5 inserted into the notch 32f. And the contact part 901d is provided below the press receiving part 901b via the flat part 901c which inclines to the front lower side. At this time, the flat plate portion 901c
Are disposed along the upper surface of the support portion 907a provided on the rear surface of the base member 907.

As shown in FIG. 37, the contact portion 901d of the conductive member 901 is accommodated in the accommodation space 905a of the base member 907 when the gaming board 30 is not attached to the front frame 5 (
Keep buried). On the other hand, when the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5 as shown in FIG. 38, the contact of the conductive member 901 is accompanied by the push-out of the pressure receiving portion 901b by the projecting pressing portion 5d of the front frame 5. The portion 901d is also pushed forward. And, the pressure receiving portion 9
When 01b is completely pushed out of the notch 32f, the contact portion 901d is moved by the base member 907.
It changes to the projecting state which protrudes outside (outside game board 30) from exposure opening 907b opened and provided in the front of (accommodation space formation part 905).

As described above, the conductive member 901 functions as a leaf spring that elastically deforms when the pressure receiving portion 901b receives a force in the forward direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 39, when the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 is closed in a state where the contact portion 901d is converted from the buried state to the projecting state, the contact portion 901d is The conductive portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b provided contacts. Thus, the conductive member 901 causes the static electricity of the game board 30 to pass through the conductive portion 6 c and the glass frame 6.
It can be removed and removed.

At this time, under the contact portion 901d and at the lower end of the conductive member 901, a stopper portion 901e for restricting the forward protrusion of the contact portion 901d is provided, and the stopper portion 901e corresponds to the exposed opening 907b of the base member 907. By being locked to the operation restricting portion 907c forming the lower frame, the projecting state of the contact portion 901d is stabilized.

The static elimination unit 900 according to the first embodiment of the present invention does not have the game board 30 housed in the front frame 5, that is, in a situation where the game board 30 is transported or detached, the conductive member 90 is used.
1 keeps the embedded state where it is not exposed from the base member 907 (accommodating space 905a), so the conductive member 901 can prevent the worker from being injured. Meanwhile, the game board 30
In the state in which the front frame 5 is housed, the conductive member 901 is converted by the projection pressing portion 5 d of the front frame 5 from the embedded state to the projection state projecting to the outside of the base member 907. When the glass frame 6 is closed when the conductive member 901 is in the projecting state, the conductive portion 6c of the reinforcing metal plate 6b contacts the contact portion 901d and functions as an earth member for removing static electricity charged on the game board 30.

Thus, the static elimination unit 900 of the present invention can reliably remove static electricity charged on the game board 32 made of resin by releasing it to the frame side (here, the glass frame 6). In addition, since the posture state of the conductive member 901 is converted according to the storage situation of the game board 30, it is possible to provide a safe carrying operation and an attaching / detaching operation. In addition, since the operation of converting the conductive member 901 and the operation of contacting the grounding member are completed along with the operation of storing the game board 30 in the storage frame consisting of the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6, no special charge removal operation is required. It is. And, without the accommodation work efficiency of the game board 30 decreasing, efficient charge removal can be provided.

The guide rails 32a provided on the game board 32 and partitioning the game area 31 function as charging members for collecting static electricity charged on the game board 32, and the guide rails 32a and the game board 30 are provided.
The conductive member 901 of the static elimination unit 900 provided at the end of the conductive member is electrically connected via the conductive member 908. By providing the charging member for collecting static electricity on the game board 32 which is easily charged, the current collection efficiency is improved, and static electricity charged on the game board 32 can be efficiently removed.

The charging member of the game board 30 in contact with the contact portion 908a of the conduction member 908 is not limited to the guide rail 32a. As long as the member is provided on the game board 30 and has high conductivity, it may be a plated part for decoration. In order to cause the decoration member attached to the game board 32 to function as the charging member so as to face the game area 31, a metal film may be attached to the decoration member.
The charging member facing the game area 31 can be disposed without impairing the appearance of 1 (the rear of the game board 32).

Further, the base member 907 of the static elimination unit 900 is fixed to the game board 32 by the screw 904 in a state of being held by the partitioning member 32 b provided in front of the game board 32 and the game board 32. As a result, the attachment state of the base member 907 supporting the conductive member 901 to the game board 32 becomes strong and stable.

Here, a highly conductive screw 904 is used as a fastening member for fastening the static elimination unit 900 to the game board 32. At this time, not only the base member 907 but also the conductive member 901 is fixed to the game board 32 together. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the game board 32 is transferred to the conductive member 9 through the fastening member.
Since it leads to 01, the static elimination efficiency is improved.

In the first embodiment of the present invention, the charge removal unit 900 is closed when the glass frame 6 is closed.
The conductive member 901 is grounded to the outer frame side (glass frame 6) of the frame (opening and closing frame 4), but may be grounded to the inner frame side (front frame 5).

(Modification)
FIG. 40 is a view showing a static elimination unit of a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. Figure 40
(A) is a perspective view, FIG. 40 (B) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view in the state attached to the frame.

In the modification, as shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B), a protective wall 907d is protruded forward along the left and right frames of the exposure opening 907b of the base member 907. The protective wall 907d is provided to be able to cover the contact portion 901d from the left and right sides when the contact portion 901d of the conductive member 901 is in a projecting state, and at this time, the conductive portion 6c of the reinforcing sheet metal 6b of the glass frame 6 is the protective wall 907d. Contact the contact portion 901d.

Thereby, the side edge of the contact portion 901d of the conductive member 901 which is a thin plate can be protected from breakage or deformation.

The structure of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, control of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. First, the specification of the game in this embodiment will be described.

[Game machine specifications]
FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the specifications of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of this invention. (A) is a specification of the variable display game, (B) is a generation ratio of each big hit state (special game state) when the special view variable display game is a special result, and (C) is a lottery gate (a variable part, the second 1 passage gate 34g
) Round distribution table 1 including the selection probability of the number of rounds in the big hit state when the game ball passes through, (D) when the game ball passes through the fixed gate (fixed part, second pass gate part 34h) The round distribution table 2 including the number of rounds in the big hit state is shown.

Referring to (A), in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to 1/300 in the low probability state and to 1/50 in the high probability state (probability state).

In addition, when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game, it shifts to the probability change state with the probability of 65/100. Specifically, as shown in (B), three types of first special result probability variation big hit, second special result regular hit, second special result probability variation big hit are generated, respectively, 5/100, 35/10.
It is selected with the probability of 0, 60/100.

The number of rounds in the jackpot state can be selected from 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds and 16 rounds. In the first special result probability variation big hit, 16 rounds are always selected. On the other hand, in the case of the second special result normal big hit and the second special result probability variation big hit, any of 5 rounds, 10 rounds or 15 rounds is selected.

Specifically, as described above, when the gaming ball passes the lottery gate of the sorting device 90,
As shown in (C), 5 rounds or 15 rounds are selected with a probability of 50/100.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the fixed gate, ten rounds are always selected as shown in (D).

Finally, the common drawing variation display game will be described. In this embodiment, when it is not in the normal power support state (power support state, short time state or definite change state) (non-power support state), the winning probability of the common drawing variation display game is set to 0/128. It is set not to win.

On the other hand, in the case of the common power support state, the winning probability of the common drawing variation display game is 127/128.
And is set to win almost certainly. When the common drawing variation display game is won, the ordinary electric role is released for 1.5 seconds, and this opening is repeated three times.
Further, a plurality of opening patterns may be defined, and the normal motorized role may be opened in any of the opening patterns by lottery.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game is one second regardless of whether or not the common power support state. In the non-power-on state, if the winning probability of the common drawing variation display game is set to a value larger than 0 and the fluctuation time is set longer, it takes time to finish the common drawing variation display game. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to shift to the normal power support state immediately after the end of the special game state. The winning probability of the common map variation display game is 0
By setting it to and making the fluctuation time constant, it is possible to shift to the power transmission support state immediately after the end of the special game state.

Even in the non-power-supply state, the winning probability of the common-pattern variation display game may be set to a value larger than zero. Furthermore, a plurality of opening patterns may be set. For example, in addition to the normal short circuit short circuit opening, a normal short circuit open circuit may be included to open the ordinary motorized part for a relatively long time with a predetermined probability. During Fuden Long release, special effects may be performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although two start winning openings are provided, the first special result probability variation big hit, the second special result normal big hit, the second special even if winning any start winning opening As a result, although the distribution of the probability variation big hit is the same, for example, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening, the probability of being distributed to the first special result probability variation big hit, etc. It may be set to be more advantageous when the ball wins.

Subsequently, state transition in the gaming machine of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. Figure 4
FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining state transition in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, in the normal state, when the game ball is won in the start-up winning opening, the variable display game is started. If the variable display game is released, the normal state is restored.

If the result of the variable display game is the first special result, as described with reference to FIG. At this time, the second special fluctuation winning device 42 disposed at the upper part of the center case 34 is opened.

On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display game is the second special result, the player causes the distribution device 90 to
The game ball is fired toward the, and the game ball is allowed to pass through the lottery gate (first pass gate unit 34g) or the fixed gate (second pass gate unit 34h).

As described above, when the player selects the lottery gate (first pass gate unit 34g) and passes the game ball, the fifth round or the fifteenth round is selected by lottery. On the other hand, when the fixed gate (second passing gate portion 34h) is selected, 10 rounds are always selected.

In this embodiment, the probability of selecting 5 rounds and the probability of selecting 15 rounds are set to 50/100, respectively, but it is selected when the lottery gate (first pass gate unit 34g) is selected. If the expected number of rounds is set to be 10 rounds, another round number may be set. For example, 4 rounds and 5 16 rounds
The selection may be made with a probability of 0/100, or five rounds, ten rounds, and fifteen rounds may be selected with equal probability.

Therefore, the player may select the fixed gate so as to surely obtain 10 rounds of winning balls, or may select the lottery gate capable of obtaining more winning balls, which is selected by preference can do.

Also, when the result of the variable display game is the second special result, when the special game state is started, the first special change winning device 41 of the attacker type disposed in the lower right of the game board 30 It is released for the selected number of rounds.

[Game control device / effect control device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the game control device 600 and the effect control device 700 provided in the game machine 1 will be described.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a control system centering on the game control apparatus 600 of the game machine 1. FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing a control system centering on the effect control device 700 of the gaming machine 1.

The game control device 600 shown in FIG. 43 is a main control device (main substrate) that controls the game in the game machine 1 in an integrated manner. The game control device 600 includes a power supply device 800 and a payout control device 640.
, And effect control device 700 is connected. The game control device 600 transmits control signals (commands) to the payout control device 640 and the effect control device 700, and instructs execution of various processes. Further, various switches and solenoids to be controlled are connected to the game control device 600.

The game control device 600 includes a CPU unit 610 that performs various arithmetic processing, an input unit 620 that receives input of various signals, and an output unit 630 that outputs various signals and control signals. CPU
The unit 610, the input unit 620 and the output unit 630 are connected to one another by a data bus 680.

The input unit 620 receives signals output from various switches provided on the game board 30 and the like and signals output from the payout control device 640. The input unit 620 includes a proximity interface (I / F) 621 (621a, 621b) and an input port 622 (622a, 622).
b), 623 is provided.

The input ports 622 and 623 receive signals input via the proximity I / F 621 and directly receive signals input from the outside. The information input to the input ports 622 and 623 is provided to the CPU unit 610 or the like through the data bus 680.

The proximity I / F 621 is an interface that receives signals output from various switches, converts those input signals, and outputs the converted signals to the input port 622. The first start port switch 601, the second start port switch 602, the gate switch 603, the winning port switches 604a to 604n, and the lower count switches 605a to 605m are connected to the proximity I / F 621a. In addition, the proximity I / F 621 b includes the upper count switch 606 and the first passage detection sensor 6.
07a and the second passage detection sensor 607b are connected.

The first starting opening switch 601 is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has won the first starting winning opening 37. The second starting opening switch 602 is a switch for detecting that the gaming ball has won the second starting winning opening 38. The gate switch 603 is for the game ball to be a start-up gate 36
It is a switch which detects that it passed through. The winning opening switches 604 a to 604 n are switches for detecting that the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 40.

The lower count switches 605a to 605m and the upper count switch 606 are switches for detecting that the gaming ball has won the special winning opening. Lower count switch 605a to 605
When the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the m and upper count switch 606, the number of winning gaming balls is counted, and the counted number of gaming balls is stored in the memory provided in the gaming control device 600.

The first passage detection sensor 607a detects that the gaming ball has passed through the first passage gate unit 34g provided in the sorting device 90. Similarly, the second passage detection sensor 607b detects that the gaming ball has passed through the second passage gate unit 34h.

The proximity I / F 621 receives a signal of negative logic such as 11 V at a high level and 7 V at a low level supplied from various switches, and converts it into a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal. Proximity I /
Since F621 normally falls within a predetermined range (7 V-11 V), the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to cause floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

Note that the proximity I / F is connected to the proximity I / F 621 by attaching or detaching the connector of the switch.
Since the output value (ON / OFF) of the signal input to 621 is switched, proximity I / F 621
Is configured to maintain the output constant even when the switch is not connected.

Further, the reason why two proximity I / Fs of proximity I / F 621a and proximity I / F 621b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 621a is limited. The cost may be reduced by using a proximity I / F 621 b smaller than the proximity I / F 621 a according to the number of input terminals which are insufficient. Note that the proximity I / F 621b may not be provided by using one having the necessary number of input terminals as the proximity I / F 621a.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 24 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the input port 622a. Further, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 23 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 5 or the like of the gaming machine 1 is also input to the input port 622a.

The magnetic sensor 23 detects a magnetic force to detect a cheating operation of the trajectory of the launched game ball by a magnet. The radio wave sensor 24 detects a radio wave emitted toward the gaming machine 1 in order to detect a fraudulent act of causing the prize hole switch 604 or the like to malfunction. Note that a vibration sensor that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the input port 622a.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621, the output to the input port 622b is supplied from the game control device 600 to the non-illustrated test shot testing device via the relay board 650. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 621, the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 601 and the second starting opening switch 602 are input to the gaming microcomputer 611 via the reversing circuit 612 in addition to the input port 622b. It is configured. The inverting circuit 612 is provided on the assumption that a signal from a micro switch or the like is input to the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 611 and negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) is detected as an effective level. Because it is designed to

Therefore, when a micro switch is used as the first starting opening switch 601 and the second starting opening switch 602, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 611 without providing the reversing circuit 612. . That is, when it is desired to directly input a negative logic signal from the first starting opening switch 601 and the second starting opening switch 602 to the gaming microcomputer 611, the proximity switch can not be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 621 is
It has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such level conversion function, proximity I /
A voltage of 12 V is supplied to F 621 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V necessary for the operation of the normal IC from the power supply device 800.

A signal from the magnetic sensor 23 is directly input to the input port 622 a.
3 is a front frame open detection switch (SW) 25 and a glass frame open detection switch (SW) 26
The signal from is directly input. The input port 623 also receives a status signal or the like indicating a dispensing abnormality from the dispensing control device 640.

The front frame opening detection switch 25 detects that the front frame 5 has been opened. Front frame open detection S
W 25 is set to ON when the front frame 5 is released from the main body frame 2, and is set to OFF when the front frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 2.

The glass frame open detection switch 26 detects that the glass frame 6 has been opened. The glass frame open detection switch 26 is set to ON when the glass frame 6 is released from the front frame 5 and is set to OFF when the glass frame 6 is closed to the front frame 5.

The data held by the input port 622 b is input to the input port 62 for the gaming microcomputer 611.
Reading can be performed by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to 2b. Input port 62
The same applies to 2a and an input port 623 described later.

The CPU unit 610 of the game control device 600 includes a gaming microcomputer 611, a reversing circuit 612, and a crystal oscillator 613.

The gaming microcomputer 611 has a CPU 611a, a ROM 611b, and a RAM 611c, executes a program stored in the ROM 611b based on a signal input through the input unit 620, and executes various processes such as a big hit lottery . The gaming microcomputer 611 is a first special view fluctuation display unit (special view 1 display) 51 via the output unit 630, and a second special view fluctuation display unit
Special drawing 2 display) 52, common drawing fluctuation display unit (general drawing display) 53, special drawing 1 reservation display unit 54, special drawing 2 reservation display unit 55, common drawing reservation display unit 56, high probability display unit 57, Batch display device 50 configured of a special drawing / general drawing LED board or the like provided with the time saving state display part 58 and the round number display part 59
The control signal is transmitted to the general electric power solenoid 27, the special winning opening solenoid 28, the effect control device 700, and the payout control device 640 to control the gaming machine 1 in an integrated manner. The gaming microcomputer 611 is
The chip select selects a port for inputting or outputting a signal.

The ROM 611 b is a non-volatile storage medium, and stores programs, data, and the like for game control.

The RAM 611 c is a volatile storage medium, and is used as a work area for temporarily storing information (for example, a random value and the like) necessary for game control.

The inverting circuit 612 is a signal input through the proximity I / F 621 (first start port switch 6
01 and the logic value of the signal from the 2nd starting opening switch 602 is inverted and the game microcomputer 6
Output to 11.

The crystal oscillator 613 is configured as a timer interrupt, a system clock signal, and an operation clock source of hard random numbers for performing a big hit lottery and the like.

The output unit 630 of the game control device 600 includes ports 631 a to 631 e and a buffer 632.
a, 632 b, drivers 633 a to 633 d, and a photocoupler 634.

The ports 631a to 631e receive signals input via the data bus 680.

The buffers 632a and 632b temporarily hold signals input via the data bus 680 and the ports 631a and 631b.

The drivers 633a to 633d generate various drive signals from the signals input via the ports 631c to 631e and output the drive signals to the respective devices.

The photocoupler 634 is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 670, removes noise from various signals input and output, and shapes the waveforms of various signals. Information is transmitted and received between the photocoupler 634 and the inspection device 670 by serial communication.

The payout control device 640 controls the CPU unit 61 by parallel communication via the port 631a.
The information output from 0 is transmitted. Specifically, a 4-bit data signal and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of data are output. Since it is not necessary to secure one-way communication to the payout control device 640, a control signal is directly transmitted from the port 631a to the payout control board of the payout control device 640.

Further, the payout control device 640 outputs a release permission signal to the release control device. The launch control device can launch the game ball to the game area 31 only when the launch permission signal is input.

The payout control device 640 discharges the winning balls from the payout unit (not shown) based on the winning ball command signal from the game control device 600, or the payout unit based on the lent ball request signal from the card unit (not shown). Discharge the lent balls from the As described above, the payout control device 640 outputs the payout abnormality status signal, the chute ball disconnection switch signal, and the overflow switch signal to the game control device 600 when a failure such as a ball breakage or a failure occurs.

The payout abnormality status signal is a signal that is output when the payout of the gaming ball is not properly performed. The payout shoot ball out switch signal is a signal that is output when the game ball before payout is insufficient. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when gaming balls of a predetermined amount or more are stored in the lower tray 14 (see FIG. 1). Game control device 600
The data is transmitted to the effect control device 700 through serial communication.

The sub-command is input to the effect control device 700 via the buffer 632 a of the output unit 630. By including the buffer 632a, it is possible to prevent input of a signal to the game control device 600 from the side of the effect control device 700, and one-way communication can be secured. Subcommands transmitted to the effect control device 700 include a fluctuation start command,
A presentation control command signal such as a customer waiting demo command, a fanfare command, a probability information command, and an error designation command is included.

Port 631 b and driver 6 for the big winning opening solenoid 28 and the common power solenoid 27
A signal output from the CPU unit 610 is input through 33 a. Big winning opening solenoid 2
8a turns the open / close door 41a (see FIG. 3) of the first special variation winning device 41, and the special winning opening solenoid 28b turns the pivoting portion 42a (see FIG. 3) of the second special variation winning device 42. , And the common electric solenoid 27 is movable member 3 so that the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 38 is permitted.
Convert 8a to the open state.

The collective display device 50 is configured of a special view / common view LED substrate and a case member for accommodating the special view / general view LED substrate. The anode terminals of the LEDs of the batch display device 50 are connected to the driver 633c through segment lines, and the driver 633c and the port 631c are connected. The cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 50 is a driver 633 via a digit line.
The driver 633 b is connected to the port b and the port 631 b is connected. Batch display device 5
The on / off drive signal from the driver 633c is input to the anode terminal of the 0 LED,
The cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 50 outputs an on / off drive signal to the driver 633 b.

The external information terminal 660 is provided with a photo relay, and is a terminal for outputting game data such as a start signal indicating the start of the variable display game and a prize signal indicating the occurrence of a big hit gaming state to the information collecting terminal device. The game data is output to the external information terminal 660 via the port 631 e and the driver 633 d.

The game control device 600 is configured to be connectable to an external shot test device via the relay substrate 650. The test shooting test device is a device for performing a type test of the gaming machine 1 at a predetermined organization. The test firing test apparatus includes a first start opening switch 601, a second start opening switch 602, a gate switch 603, a winning opening switch 604a to 604n, and a lower count switch 605a.
Signals necessary for the test shot test such as signals from the count switch 606 and signals output to the special winning opening solenoid 28 and the common current solenoid 27 are input.

The game control device 600 is connected to the power supply device 800 via a Schmitt circuit 624 provided in the input unit 620. The Schmitt circuit 624 is a circuit for removing fluctuation (noise) of the input signal in order to prevent the operation of the gaming machine 1 from becoming unstable at the time of the rise of the power supply or at the time of the power supply cutoff. The Schmitt circuit 624 receives the power failure monitoring signal, the initialization switch signal, and the reset signal from the power supply device 800.

The power supply 800 generates AC-DC to generate a DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V
A normal power supply unit 810 having a converter, a DC-DC converter for generating a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a gaming microcomputer 611
Backup power supply unit 820 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM 611c at the time of a power failure
And a control signal generation unit having a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch, generating and outputting control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 600 of occurrence and recovery of power failure. And 830.

The backup power supply unit 820 is a power supply for backing up the game data stored in the RAM 611 c of the gaming microcomputer 611. After the power failure is restored, the gaming control device 600
Based on the game data held by the AM 611 c, the game state before power failure is restored.

The control signal generation unit 830 monitors the input voltage (guaranteed DC 32 V) of the switching regulator that generates 12 V DC and 5 V DC. Detection voltage is DC17.2V to DC20.0
When it is V, it determines with a power failure, and the control signal generation part 830 outputs a power failure monitoring signal. The power failure monitoring signal is input to the input port 623 of the input unit 620 via the Schmitt circuit 624. After the output of the power failure monitoring signal, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a reset signal. The reset signal is input to the gaming microcomputer 611 and the ports 631 a to 631 e of the output unit 630 via the Schmitt circuit 624. When receiving the power failure monitoring signal, the game control device 600 performs a predetermined power failure process, and stops the operation of the CPU unit 610 after receiving the reset signal.

The control signal generation unit 830 includes an initialization switch (not shown), and when the power supply is turned on, the initialization switch signal is output from the control signal generation unit 830 when the initialization switch is in the ON state. The initialization switch signal is input to the input unit 62 via the Schmitt circuit 624.
Input to 0 input port 623. The initialization switch signal is an RA of the gaming microcomputer 611.
This is a signal for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM of the M 611 c and the payout control device 640.

As described above, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are temporarily input to the input port 623, taken into the gaming microcomputer 611 via the data bus 680, and treated as signals equivalent to the signals from various switches. . This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided to the gaming microcomputer 611 is restricted.

On the other hand, as described above, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt circuit 624 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 611,
It is supplied to each port of the output unit 630. Also, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay substrate 650 without passing through the output unit 630, the relay substrate 6 can be output to the trial shot test device.
It is configured to turn off the shooting test signal held at the 50 ports (not shown).
In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 650. The reset signal RST is input to each of the ports 622 and 623 of the input unit 620.
Not supplied to It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 630 by the gaming microcomputer 611 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 620 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 611 from the port is discarded by the resetting of the gaming microcomputer 611.

The effect control device 700 shown in FIG. 44 is a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 710 which is composed of an amusement chip (IC) like the gaming microcomputer 611 of the game control device 600.
And a video control microcomputer (2nd C) that performs video control and the like under the control of the main control microcomputer 710.
(PU) 720, and VDP (Video Display Process) that performs image processing for displaying a video on the variable display device 35 (see FIG. 2) in accordance with commands and data from the microcomputer 720 for video control.
and a sound source LSI 705 for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.

PROMs (Programmable Read Only Memories) 702 and 703 storing programs executed by the respective CPUs are connected to the main control microcomputer 710 and the image control microcomputer 720, respectively.

Connected to the VDP 730 is an image ROM 704 in which character images and video data are stored.

  The sound source LSI 705 is connected to an audio ROM 706 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The main control microcomputer 710 analyzes the command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 611 of the gaming control device 600, and instructs the video control microcomputer 720 the contents of the output image, or the sound source L
It instructs SI 705 the contents of the playback sound. Further, based on the control command from the game control device 600, the main control microcomputer 710 also executes processing such as lighting control of LEDs and the like, drive control of various motors, management of presentation time, and the like.

RAM 7 that provides a work area for the main control microcomputer 710 and the video control microcomputer 720
11, 721 are provided inside each chip. In addition, R providing work area
The AMs 711 and 721 may be provided outside the chip.

Between the main control microcomputer 710 and the image control microcomputer 720, the main control microcomputer 710
The sound source LSI 705 is configured to transmit and receive data in a serial manner. On the other hand, between the main control microcomputer 710 and the VDP 730, transmission and reception of data are performed in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in the parallel system, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial system.

The VDP 730 includes a VRAM (Video RAM) 731 used to expand or process image data such as a character read from the image ROM 704, and enlarges the image,
A scaler 732 for reduction processing and a signal conversion circuit 733 for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the variable display device 35 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method are provided.

From the VDP 730 to the main control microcomputer 710, the image of the variable display 35 and the front frame 5
And the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC to synchronize with the lighting of the LED etc.
Is output. In addition, the VDP 731 to the image control microcomputer 720
The interrupt signals INT0 to INT and a wait signal WAIT for notifying that it is in a state of waiting for reception of a command or data from the image control microcomputer 720 are output in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing on.

From the image control microcomputer 720 to the main control microcomputer 710, the image control microcomputer 72
A synchronization signal SYNC is output which notifies that 0 is operating normally and gives a transmission timing of a command.

The interrogation signal CTS and the response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 710 and the sound source LSI 705 in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

As the image control microcomputer 720, a CPU capable of processing at a higher speed than the main control microcomputer 710 is used. Video control microcomputer 720 separately from main control microcomputer 710
By sharing the processing, it becomes possible to display on the variable display device 35 a large-screen, fast-moving image that is difficult to realize with the main control microcomputer 710 alone, and is equivalent to the image control microcomputer 720. The increase in cost can be suppressed as compared to the case of using two CPUs having processing capabilities.

The effect control device 700 includes an interface chip (command I / F) 701 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600. The effect control device 700
Fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control device 600 via command I / F 701,
The customer waiting demo command, the fanfare command, the probability information command, the error designation command and the like are received as an effect control command signal. The gaming microcomputer 611 of the gaming control device 600
Since the main control microcomputer 710 of the effect control device 700 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 701 is provided with a function of converting the level of the signal.

In the effect control device 700, a panel decoration LED control circuit 741 for controlling a panel decoration device 45 including LEDs and the like provided on the center case 34 and the game board 30, an LE provided on the front frame 5 and the like
A frame decoration LED control circuit 742 for controlling the frame decoration device 21 including D, etc., and a panel effect device 4 including an electric character or decoration member 7 etc. which enhances the effect by cooperating with the effect display on the variable display device 35
A panel effect motor / SOL (solenoid) control circuit 743 that drives and controls 6 and a frame effect motor control circuit 744 that drives and controls a frame effect device 22 including an illumination drive motor of the movable illumination 9 and the like are provided. These control circuits (741 to 744) are connected to the main control microcomputer 710 via an address / data bus 740.

In addition, in the effect control device 700, an effect button SW (switch) 751 for detecting that the effect button 17 or the selection button 29 (see FIG. 1) is operated, and an effect motor for detecting that various drive motors are driven. A switch (SW) input circuit 750 is provided which detects on / off states of switches (SWs) 752 a to 752 n and a human sensor (infrared sensor) 590 and transmits a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 710. In addition, amplifier circuits 707 and 708 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b.
Is provided.

The normal power supply unit 810 of the power supply device 800 includes the effect control device 700 and the effect control device 70.
In order to supply a DC voltage of a predetermined level to the electronic component controlled by 0, a plurality of types of voltages can be generated. Specifically, DC 32 V for driving a drive motor or a solenoid, DC 12 V for driving a variable display device 35 including a liquid crystal panel or the like
In addition to DC5V which becomes the power supply voltage of command I / F 701, DC18V for driving the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, and it is used for making a reference of these DC voltages and a power supply monitor lamp It is possible to generate a voltage of NDC 24V.

The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 830 of the power supply device 800 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 710, the video control microcomputer 720, the VDP 730, the sound source LSI 705, and various control circuits (741 to 744, 707, and 708). , Reset these. The power supply device 800 uses the general-purpose port of the microcomputer 720 for video control to
It has a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for P730. As a result, the cooperation between the image control microcomputer 720 and the VDP 730 can be improved.

As described above, the effect control device 700 functions as effect control means for effecting control based on the command transmitted from the game control device 600, and is a display control means for controlling the display content displayed on the variable display device 35. And, the speaker 10 has a function as a sound output control means for outputting a sound effect or the like.

The above is the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Subsequently, specific control by the game control device 600 will be described.

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the latter half of the main processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main processing is started when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. For example, it is executed when the game machine is powered on to start sales in a game arcade or when it recovers from a power failure.

When the main processing is executed, the game control device 600 first prohibits an interrupt (step A1001). Next, an interrupt vector setting process is performed to set a vector address indicating a jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs (step A1002). Further, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer is set which is the top address of the area for saving the values of the register etc. (step A1003). Furthermore, read the status of input port 623 (
Step A1004) The mode of interrupt processing is set (Step A1005).

Next, the game control device 600 sets a power on delay timer for waiting until the program of the dependent control device (the payout control device (disbursement substrate)) or the effect control device 700 starts properly (step A1006). ). For example, the power on delay timer is set to stand by for 3 seconds. By controlling in this way, when the power is turned on, the game control device 600 is first activated to transmit a command to the dependent control device before the activation of the payout control device 640 or the effect control device 700 is completed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the subordinate control device from dropping the transmitted command. Therefore, the game control device 600
When the power is turned on, the start control of the main control unit (game control apparatus 600) is delayed to set a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the dependent control apparatus.

The initialization switch signal is input to the input port 623. By reading the state of the input port 623 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch can be detected reliably. That is, when the state of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time, or the initialization switch is operated continuously from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. There is a need to. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

When the setting of the power on delay timer is completed, the game control device 600 executes a process of monitoring a power failure (step A1007 to step A1011). The game control device 600
First, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal is set (step A1007). The power failure monitoring signal is checked by reading the power failure monitoring signal output from the power supply device 800.
The number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal is, for example, twice. When a power failure occurs, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on.

Next, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1008). Then, the determination in step A1008 is repeated as many times as the number of checks set in the process of step A1007 (step A1009).

When it is measured that the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (result of step A1009 is "Y"), the game control device 600 determines that a power failure has occurred, and the power is shut off. Wait up to. As described above, by checking the power failure monitoring signal for the predetermined number of checks, it is possible to prevent false detection due to noise or the like. That is, the game control device 600 is a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 600 is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with problems at the time of power on.

Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of step A1009 is "N"), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 600 updates the power on delay timer by -1 (step A1010). ), It is determined whether the value of the power on delay timer is 0 or not (step A1011). If the value of the power on delay timer is not 0 (the result of step A1011 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not elapsed, the process returns to step A1007.

On the other hand, when the value of the power on delay timer is 0 (step A1)
If the result of 011 is "Y", that is, if the waiting time has elapsed, the RAM or EEPRO
Allows access to read-write RWM (read-write memory) such as M (M
Step A1012). Further, all output ports are set to be off (no output) (step A1013). Further, the serial port installed in advance in the gaming microcomputer 611 is set to be not used (step A1014). In the present embodiment, the game control device 6
In 00, serial communication is performed with the effect control device 700.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 determines whether the initialization switch signal in the power supply device 800 is set to ON (step A1015). The initialization switch signal is a signal for setting whether or not to start the game in the initialized state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

For example, when the power is turned off in a definite change state when the store is closed and the power is turned on when the store is opened the next day, the initialization switch signal is set to ON so that the game is started in the initialized state. Be done. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again after a power failure, the initialization switch signal is turned off so that the gaming machine is not initialized in order to resume the game as close to the gaming state before the power failure as possible. It is set.

When the initialization switch signal is set to OFF (the result of step A 1015 is “N”), the game control device 600 checks whether the data of the power failure inspection area in the RWM is normal ( Step A1016, Step A1017). To explain in more detail,
The power failure inspection region includes a power failure inspection region 1 and a power failure inspection region 2. Then, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is stored in the blackout inspection area 1, and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is stored in the blackout inspection area 2. In the process of step A1016, it is determined whether the power failure inspection area check data 1 stored in the power failure inspection area 1 is normal. Similarly, step A1017
It is determined whether the blackout inspection area check data 2 stored in the blackout inspection area 2 is normal or not.

If it is determined that the blackout inspection area check data of the blackout inspection area in the RWM is normal (the result of step A1016, step A1017 is "Y")
), Executes checksum calculation processing to calculate verification data called checksum (
Step A1018).

Then, the game control device 600 compares the value of the checksum calculated in the checksum calculation process with the value of the checksum calculated at the time of power-off, and determines whether or not these values match ((1) Step A1019).

On the other hand, when the initialization switch signal is set to ON (the result of step A1009 is “Y”), the gaming control device 600 does not have a normal power failure inspection area value (step A10).
If the result of step 1610 or step A1017 is "N", and the value of the checksum at power-off does not match the value of the checksum calculated in the process of step A1018 (step A)
The result of 1019 is "N", and the initialization process from step A1040 to step A1043 of FIG. 46 is executed. Details of the initialization process will be described later.

When the value of the calculated checksum and the value of the checksum at the time of power-off coincide with each other (the result of step A1019 is “Y”), the game control device 600 performs the power failure process normally, so the game control device 600 initially Save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be integrated (step A1020)
. For example, information for determining whether or not information at the time of a power failure was normally stored is stored, RWM (Read / Write Memory: RAM in the embodiment) area (power failure inspection area, checksum, error) Clear relevant information and areas for storing information for monitoring fraudulent activity etc.).

Next, the gaming control device 600 determines whether the gaming state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is a high probability state from the area storing the gaming state in the RWM (step A 1021). If it is determined that the probability is not high (the result at step A 1021 is “N”), the processing at step A 1024 and subsequent steps is executed.

In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of the power failure is in the high probability state (the result of step A 1021 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the high probability notification flag to on and the high probability The notification flag area is saved (saved) (step A1022). Subsequently, the LED of the high probability display unit 57 provided in the collective display device 50 is set to ON (lighting up) (step A)
1023).

Furthermore, game control control equipment 600 transmits the command at the time of the power failure restoration which corresponds to the special figure game processing number to production control control equipment 700 (step A1024). The special figure game process number is a number indicating the state of the special figure game, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM when a power failure occurs. Thus, by transmitting to the effect control device 700 a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number, it is possible to restart the game in a state as close as possible before the power failure occurs.

Here, the case of executing the initialization process will be described. As mentioned above, the initialization process is
It is executed when activating the gaming machine whose power is normally cut off or when it is not possible to return to the state before the power failure occurred.

In the initialization processing, the game control device 600 first clears all work areas before the access prohibited area (step A1040). Further, all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared (step A1041). Then, an initial value for power-on is saved (saved) in the initialized area (step A1042). Furthermore, the command at the time of power on is transmitted to the effect control device 700 (step A1043), and the processing after step A1025 is executed.

Note that the power failure recovery command sent in step A 1024 and step A 1043
The command at the time of power-on transmitted by is the model specification command indicating the type of gaming machine, Special figure 1
, A decoration special figure 1 holding number command showing the number of holdings of 2 and a decoration special figure 2 holding number command, and a probability information command showing the state of probability. In addition, depending on the state when the power is shut off or the power is turned on,
Includes a recovery screen command if the special view variation display game is running at the time of power off, a wait for customer demo command if the customer is waiting at power off, and a power on command if it is initialized at power on. Be Furthermore, a rendering mode information command indicating the state of the rendering mode depending on the model, and a time saving information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state are included.

The game control device 600 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 611 (clock generator) when the processing of step A 1024 or step A 1043 is completed. Start up (
Step A1025).

The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 611. The clock generator includes a divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 613 and the CTC circuit described above. The timer interrupt signal is a signal for causing the CPU 611a to generate a timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) based on the divided signal. The random number update trigger signal (CTC) is supplied to the random number generation circuit based on the divided signal, and the random number generation circuit serves as a trigger for updating the random number.

When activating the CTC circuit, the game control device 600 performs activation setting of the random number generation circuit (step A1026). Specifically, the CPU 611a can set a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit
Processing such as setting a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the CTC update permission register) is executed. At this time, it may be checked whether the random number generation circuit operates properly.

Furthermore, the game control device 600 sets the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on as the initial value (start value) of the corresponding various initial value random numbers. (Step A1027). Thereafter, the gaming control device 600 permits an interrupt (step A1028).

The random number generation circuit in the CPU 611a of the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on, and the initial value of various initial value random numbers based on the initial value of the soft random number register. By setting the value (start value), it is possible to break the regularity of the random number generated by the software, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number. For various initial value random numbers, for example, random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random numbers that determine the hit of the common pattern variation display game (random number hit)
Is included.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (step A1029). Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number is configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. That is, the big hit random number is a hard random number generated by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number are soft random numbers generated by software. Note that
The generation source of various random numbers is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the big hit random number may be a software random number, or the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the variation pattern random number may be hardware random numbers.

Furthermore, after the initial value random number update process is executed, the game control device 600 performs the power supply 800.
The number of times of checking the power failure monitoring signal which is input from the port and read through the port and data bus is set (step A1030). The number of checks is usually set to 2 or more. By checking the power failure monitoring signal, it can be determined whether or not a power failure has occurred. The game control device 600 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1031). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on, that is, if there is no power failure (result of step A1031 is "N"), the initial value random number updating process of step A1029 is executed again, and the process from step A1029 to step A1031 is performed. Execute repeatedly (loop processing).

Also, before the initial value random number update process (step A1029), an interrupt is permitted (step A).
1028), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process,
It becomes possible to prioritize and execute interrupt processing. Therefore, since the timer interrupt process can not be executed until the execution of the initial value random number update process is completed, it is possible to avoid running out of time for executing various processes included in the interrupt process.

In the initial value random number updating process (step A1029), in addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process may be executed by the timer interrupt process. However, when the initial value random number update process is executed in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt is generated when the initial value random number update process in the main process is executed in order to prevent the initial value random number update process from being executed in both processes. It is necessary to prohibit it and cancel the interrupt after updating the initial value random number. However, if the initial value random number update process is not executed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and the initial value random number update process is executed only in the main process, the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that the problem does not occur and the main processing is simplified. Also, various random numbers may be updated in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

It should be noted that the detection of a power failure occurrence (checking of a power failure monitoring signal) may be executed by timer interrupt processing. At this time, the detection result may be monitored in the main processing, or may be kept on standby until being reset.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is set to on (the result of step A 1031 is “Y”), the game control device 600 continuously detects that the power failure monitoring signal is set to on. It is determined whether or not the number of checks set in the process of step A1030 has been reached (step A1032). When the number of times of continuous detection that the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON has not reached the number of checks (result of step A1032 is “N”
), It is judged again whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step A1031). That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks.

When the number of times the gaming control device 600 continuously detects that the power failure monitoring signal is set to ON reaches the number of checks (result of step A1032 is "Y"), it is assumed that a power failure has occurred. Perform processing at the time of power failure occurrence (step A1033 to step A)
1039).

The game control device 600 prohibits an interrupt (step A1033), and sets all output ports to off (step A1034). Thereafter, the power failure recovery inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 1 (step A1035), and the power failure recovery inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection region 2 (step A1036).

Furthermore, the game control device 600 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum at the time of power shutoff of the RWM (step A1037), and calculates the value of the calculated checksum as the RWM.
Save in the checksum area of (step A1038). Finally, the access to the RWM is prohibited (step A1039) so that the contents of the RWM are not changed, and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine 1 is shut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating and storing the check sum at the time of power shutdown, the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.

[Timer interrupt processing (game control device)]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic (for example, one millisecond cycle) timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 611a.

When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control device 600 first saves the register by transferring the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM (step A1101).
). In the present embodiment, a Z80-based microcomputer is used as a gaming microcomputer. Z
The 80 series microcomputer is provided with a front register and a rear register, and the processing of step A1101 can be implemented by saving the value held in the front register to the rear register.

Next, the game control device 600 takes in input signals from various sensors, switches and the like input via the input unit 620, and executes input processing for reading the state of each input port (step A1102). The various sensors include a first start opening switch 601, a second start opening switch 602, a gate switch 603 in a general view, lower count switches 605a to 605m, an upper count switch 606, a first passage detection sensor 607a, and a second passage detection sensor 607 b and the like are included. Further, in the input processing, chattering removal or the like is performed on the input signal to determine input information.

Furthermore, the game control device 600 executes an output process for transmitting output data regarding game control set in various processes to the effect control device 700 and the payout control device 640 (
Step A1103). The output data is information for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid, and the solenoid to be controlled is, for example, a winning prize port solenoid 2
8 and a common power solenoid 27 are included. The output process also includes a process of outputting game data to an information collecting terminal (not shown) that collects game data in the game machine.

Next, the game control device 600 causes the payout control device 6 to set the command set in the transmission buffer.
A payout command transmission process of transmitting (outputting) to 40 is executed (step A1104). For example, a prize ball command specifying the number of prize balls to be dispensed from the payout device is transmitted.

Further, the game control device 600 executes random number update processing 1 for updating the big hit symbol random number 1 and the big hit symbol random number 2 (step A1105), and subsequently, a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game. Is executed (step A1106). In the random number updating process 1 and the random number updating process 2, counters corresponding to various random numbers (big hit random number counter, random number counter,
The value of the effect determination random number counter etc.) is incremented by one.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a winning opening switch / error monitoring process of monitoring various winning opening switches and the like, and monitoring an error such as improper opening of a frame (step A1107). The various winning opening switches include, for example, a first starting opening switch 601, a second starting opening switch 602, a gate switch 603, winning opening switches 604a to 604n, lower counting switches 605a to 605m, and an upper counting switch 606. Winning mouth switch /
In the error monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not a normal signal is input from these switches. As monitoring of errors, it is targeted whether the front frame 5 and the glass frame 6 are improperly opened.

Next, the game control device 600 executes distribution state processing for controlling the operation of the distribution device 90 for determining the number of big hit rounds in the special game state. The details of the distribution state process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the game control device 600 executes a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game (step A1109). In addition, for details of the special figure game processing, see FIG.
Will be described later. In addition, special figure game processing, corresponding to the result of the fluctuation indicatory game which is started,
Two types, one for normal use and one for big hit, may be prepared.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a common drawing game process for performing processing relating to the common drawing variation display game (step A1110).

Next, the game control device 600 executes segment LED editing processing for controlling the display contents of the segment LED for displaying the special figure variation game display and various information related to the game (step A1111). Specifically, the parameters for outputting the results of the special view variation display game and the common view variation display game to the segment LED (for example, the collective display device 50) are edited.

The game control device 600 checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 23 and executes a magnet error monitoring process to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (step A1112). Furthermore, a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality or not. Radio wave fraud monitoring processing is executed (step A1113). When the occurrence of an abnormality is detected, the notification sound is output from the speaker 10, the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on, or the like to notify the outside.

Next, the game control device 600 executes external information editing processing for editing various signals output from the external information terminal 660 (step A1114).

Then, the game control device 600 clears the interrupt request and declares the end of the interrupt (step A1115). After that, the register temporarily saved in the process of step A1101 is restored (step A1116), and the interrupt and timer interrupt by the external device which has been inhibited are permitted (step A1117), the timer interrupt process is ended, and the main process is performed. Return to

[Distribution status update process]
Next, the details of the distribution state update process (step A1108) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In this process, the distribution state of the switching unit 93 provided in the distribution device 90 disposed in the upper right portion of the center case is switched at a predetermined interval (5 seconds in this embodiment), and the information of the distribution state is obtained. Processing for outputting a command to the effect control device 700. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the distribution state update process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether the distribution state has been initialized (step A7001). In the present embodiment, the initial state of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is on the "variation side". If the distribution control state has been initialized (step A70)
The result of step 01 is “Y”, and the processing of step A 7007 and subsequent steps is executed.

On the other hand, if the distribution control state has not been initialized (step A70)
The result of 01 is “N”), and the distribution state initialization process is executed (step A7002). Then, it is determined whether the initialization is completed (step A7003). If the initialization is not completed (the result of step A 7003 is “N”), the distribution is performed in order to make the process after A 7004 wait until the initialization of the distribution state of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is completed. End status update processing.

When initialization of the switching unit 93 is completed (step A7003)
The result is “Y”), and prepare a distribution status command according to the initial distribution status (step A70).
04), execute command setting processing (step A7005). Further, a switching timer is set to set the timing of switching the distribution state (step A7006). In the present embodiment, the time set in the switching timer is five seconds.

Subsequently, if the switching timer is not 0, the gaming control device 600 updates the timer by −1 (
Step A7007). Then, it is determined whether the switching timer has become 0 (step A).
7008). If the switching timer becomes 0 (the result of step A 7008 is “Y”),
Since it is the timing to switch the distribution state, the state change of the distribution member (switching unit 93) is set (step A7014), and the switching timer is set to 5 seconds (step A7015).

On the other hand, if the switching timer has not become 0 (step A7)
It is determined whether or not the result of 008 is "N"), and the distribution state is being changed (step A700).
9). If the change of the distribution state is not in progress (the result of Step A 7009 is “N”), the change of the distribution state is completed, and the present process is ended.

If the distribution control state is being changed (the result of step A 7009 is “Y”), the game control device 600 executes distribution state change processing (step A 7010). Then, it is determined whether the change of the distribution state is completed (step A7011). If the change of the distribution state has not been completed (the result of step A 7011 is “N”), this processing ends.

When the change of the distribution state is completed (the result of step A 7011 is “Y”), the game control device 600 prepares a distribution state command according to the distribution state after the change (step A 701).
2) Execute command setting processing (step A7013).

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special view game process (step A1109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

In the special figure game process, the first passing gate unit (lottery gate) 34g and the second passing gate unit (
Fixed gate) Monitoring of passage of the game ball of 34h, monitoring of input signal by the 1st starting opening switch 601 and the 2nd starting opening switch 602, control of the whole processing regarding the special figure fluctuation indication game, special figure (identification symbol, identification information Set the display of).

The game control device 600 first executes a passing gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the passage of gaming balls of the first passing gate unit 34g and the second passing gate unit 34h (step A1201).
. The pass gate switch monitoring process is a process of extracting and storing random numbers for determining a big hit round according to the passed gates. Details of the passing gate switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the game control device 600 controls the first start opening switch 601 and the second start opening switch 60.
The start switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of 2 is executed (step A1202).

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the first starting winning opening 37, the second starting winning opening 38, various random numbers (big hit random number etc.) are extracted, and the special view variation display game based on the relevant winnings In the stage before the start of the game, the game result pre-judgment is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the gaming control device 600 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A12).
03). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the upper count switch 606 provided in the second special variation winning device 42 and the lower count switches 605 a to 605 m provided in the first special variation winning device 41 And monitor the number of winning game balls.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer has not already timed up, the gaming control device 600 updates the special figure game processing timer by −1 (step A1204). Then, it is checked whether the special view game processing timer has timed up (step A1205). In addition, the variation time of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed is set as an initial value, and the special figure game processing timer decrements the value of the special figure game processing timer by 1 in the process of step A 1204. When the value of the special view game processing timer becomes 0, it is determined that the time is up. The fluctuation time may be measured by updating the fluctuation control timer only when the fluctuation display game is executed.

When the special figure game processing timer has not timed out (the result at step A 1205 is “N”), the game control device 600 executes the processing at step A 1218 and subsequent steps.

On the other hand, when the special figure game processing timer is up (the result of step A 1205 is “Y”), the game control device 600 refers to the special figure game to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. Set sequence branch table in register (Step A12)
06). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired based on the table (step A1207). Then, the return address after the end of the branching process is saved in the stack area (step A1208), and the process is branched according to the game process number (step A1209).

When the game processing number is “0” (the result of step A1209 is “0”), the game control device 600 executes special processing normally (step A1210). The special drawing routine processing monitors the fluctuation start of the special drawing fluctuation display game, setting of the fluctuation start of the special drawing fluctuation display game, setting of the effect, setting of information necessary for executing the special drawing fluctuation processing, etc. Do. The details of the special view ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is “1” (the result of step A1209 is “1”), the game control device 600 executes the special figure variation in-progress process (step A1211). Processing during special map change is
The setting of the stop display time of the identification information in the special figure variation display game, the setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. are performed. The details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "2" (the result of step A1209 is "2"), the game control device 600 executes the special figure display processing (step A1212). Processing during the special map display is
If the result of the special view variation display game is a big hit, set the fan fare command according to the type of big hit, set the fan fare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, or perform processing during fan fare / interval Set the necessary information for In addition, the information necessary for performing the big hit round determination process is set. The details of the special view display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "3" (the result of step A1209 is "3"), the game control device 600 executes the big hit round determination process (step A1213). The big hit round determination process is a process for determining a big hit round when a second special result big hit occurs. A big hit round is determined based on the values stored in the passing flag storage area and the round random number storage area in the passing gate switch monitoring process. Details of the jackpot round determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "4" (the result of step A1209 is "4"), the game control device 600 executes the fanfare / interval process (step A1214).
. In the fanfare / interval process, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, and the like are performed. Details of the fanfare / in-interval process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game processing number is "5" (the result of step A1209 is "5"), the game control device 600 executes the special winning opening open process (step A1215). The big winning opening open process is necessary to set an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round while setting the big hit end screen command in the final round or to perform the big winning hole remaining ball processing Set information.

When the game processing number is "6" (the result of step A1209 is "6"), the game control device 600 executes the special winning opening game processing (step A1216). In the big winning opening residual ball processing, when the big hit round is the final round, the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged is set, the setting of the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing etc. To

In the special winning opening residual ball processing, the information necessary for performing the update of the processing timer of the special symbol and the fanfare / interval processing or the big hit end processing is set. Also, it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed or the special winning opening has a predetermined number (predetermined number) of game balls, and the open / close door 41a is closed when any of the conditions is satisfied. Do. After this is repeatedly executed for the predetermined number of rounds, the special figure game processing number is set to "7".

When the game processing number is "7" (the result of step A1209 is "7"), the game control device 600 executes a big hit end process (step A1217). Big hit end processing,
In the special drawing routine of step A1209, setting of information necessary for performing processing is performed. Details of the big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the fluctuation of the symbol in the collective display device 50 (special display 1 display 51) (step A1218). Subsequently, the symbol variation control process corresponding to the collective display device 50 (special view 1 display 51) is executed (step A12)
19).

Further, the game control device 600 prepares a table for controlling the fluctuation of the symbol in the collective display device 50 (special view 2 display 52) (step A1220). Subsequently, the symbol variation control process corresponding to the collective display device 50 (special view 2 display 52) is executed (step A12)
21).

[Passing gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the passing gate switch monitoring process in the special view game process described above (step A12)
The details of 01) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pass gate switch monitoring processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

When the passing gate switch monitoring process is started, the game control device 600 first determines whether the first passing detection sensor 607a is turned on, that is, whether the gaming ball passes through the first passing gate unit 34g. It is determined (step A7001). First passage detection sensor 607a
Is turned on (the result at step A7001 is "Y"), the first passage flag is saved in the passage flag storage area (step A7002). In addition, as mentioned above, the 1st passage gate part 34g is arrange | positioned at the fluctuation side, and it is the 1st in the number-of-rounds determination game (auxiliary game) executed after the special figure change display game becomes the 2nd special result. When the game ball passes through the passing gate part 34g, a big hit round of either 5 rounds or 15 rounds is carried out.

If the first pass detection sensor 607a is not turned on
It is determined whether the result of step A7001 is "N"), whether the second passage detection sensor 607b is turned on, that is, whether the gaming ball has passed through the second passage gate unit 34h (step A7003). If the second passage detection sensor 607 b is turned on (the result at step A 7003 is “Y”), the second passage flag is saved in the passage flag storage area (step A 7004). In addition, as mentioned above, the 2nd passage gate part 34h is arranged at the fixed side, and the number-of-rounds determination game to be executed after the special figure variation display game becomes the second special result (
When the game ball passes through the second pass gate unit 34h in the auxiliary game), the number of big hit rounds is always 10 rounds.

When the first passage detection sensor 607a is not turned on and the second passage detection sensor 607b is not turned on (the result of step A7003 is "N"), the game control device 600 performs the main process. Finish.

When the game ball passes through either the first pass gate unit 34g or the second pass gate unit 34h and saves the pass flag in the pass flag storage area, the game control device 600 further extracts a round determination random number, The extracted random number is saved in the round random number storage area (step A7105). Even when the fixed round is selected, the random number for round determination is extracted and the lottery for the number of big hit rounds is performed, but the random number for round determination is extracted only when the variation round is selected. You may

Subsequently, the game control device 600 determines whether or not a big hit round is being determined (step A7106). As for whether or not the big hit round is being decided, special figure game processing number “
It may be determined whether or not it is 3 ". When determining a big hit round (the result of step A7106 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends this processing to decide a big hit round in the big hit round determination process (step A1213) in the special figure game process. Do.

On the other hand, when the game control device 600 is not deciding the big hit round (step A7
If the result of step 106 is "N", it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a big hit (step A7107). If the player is not hitting the jackpot (the result of step A7107 is “N”), the player is hitting the right despite the fact that the player is not hitting the jackpot (for example, waiting for customers, normal gaming, time saving, etc.) Prepare a right-handed warning (left-handed) command (step A7108)
, And execute command setting processing (step A7109). When the presentation control device 700 receives a right strike warning (left strike) command, the effect control device 700 displays a warning prompting to perform a left strike. The warning display may be performed by the variable display device 35, but may be performed by a display (hereinafter, “sub display device”) 480 provided in the upper rendering device 400 so as not to hinder the effect of the game.

When the current gaming state is a big hit (the result of step A7107 is “Y”), and the processing of step A7109 is completed, the game control device 600 clears the passing flag storage area and the round random number storage area ( Step A7110). That is, since the passing flag storage area and the round random number storage area are not cleared when the big hit round determination is in progress,
The number of rounds can be determined based on the values stored in the passing flag storage area and the round random number storage area in the jackpot round determination process described later.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process in the special view game process described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

When the starting opening switch monitoring process is started, the game control device 600 first prepares a table for setting information of a hold due to the game ball winning in the first starting winning opening 37 (step A1301).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a special processing starting port switch common processing that is commonly executed when the gaming ball has won in the first starting winning opening 37 or the second starting winning opening 38 (step A1302). . The details of the special view starting opening switch common process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the gaming control device 600 is a normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device, the second start winning opening 38
It is determined whether or not the movable member 38a) is in operation, that is, the movable member 38a of the second start winning opening 38 is in an open state where winning of the game ball is possible (step A1303). If the ordinary motorized part is in operation (the result of step A 1303 is “Y”), step A
Execute the processing after 1305.

On the other hand, when the ordinary motorized role is not in operation (step A13)
It is judged whether the result of 03 is "N") or the common station illegal prize has occurred (step A13)
04).

Specifically describing the common electric charge unfair winning, the second starting winning opening 38 can not win the game ball when the movable member 38a is in the closed state, and the gaming ball can only win when the movable member 38a is in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, there is a high possibility that some abnormality or injustice has occurred,
When there is a game ball that has won in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of unfair prizes. In the process of step A1304, the number of incorrect winnings counted in this manner is a predetermined number
It is determined whether the upper limit value is, for example, 5 or more.

The game control device 600 relates to the special view change display game as winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 38 and invalidity when the common electric charge improper winning is occurring (the result of step A1304 is “Y”). The start opening switch monitoring process is ended without executing the process.

On the other hand, in the case where the game control device 600 has not received the common power wrong prize (step A1)
A result of 304 prepares the table which sets the information of reservation by the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 38 with the result “N” (step A1305), executes special processing starting mouth switch common processing (step A13)
06). Thereafter, the start port switch monitoring process is ended.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (step A1302, step A1306) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 52 shows the first embodiment of the present invention.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting opening switch common process of embodiment of.

Special process starting port switch common processing, when there is a signal input from the 1st starting opening switch 601 and the 2nd starting opening switch 602 due to the game ball winning in the 1st starting winning opening 37 and the 2nd starting winning opening 38 Is a process that is commonly executed.

First, the game control device 600 includes a first start opening switch 601 and a second start opening switch 60.
It is checked whether a signal is input from the starting opening switch (for example, 1st starting opening switch 601) of monitoring object among 2 (step A1401). When the signal is not input from the start port switch to be monitored (the result of step A 1401 is “N”), the special view start port switch common processing is ended.

On the other hand, when a signal is input from the start opening switch to be monitored (result of step A 1401 is “Y”), the gaming control device 600 has latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the start opening to be monitored. It is determined whether the random number is extracted or not
Step A1402). When the random number is not extracted (the result of step A 1402 is “N”), the special view starting opening switch common processing is ended.

If there is latch data in the random number latch register corresponding to the starting opening to be monitored (the result of step A 1402 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets the starting opening winning flag corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored. The data is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step A1403).
Furthermore, the extracted big hit random number is loaded to the hard random number latch register corresponding to the monitoring target starting opening switch, and preparation for use in the subsequent processing is performed (step A1404).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 600 outputs the number of times information on the number of winnings on the start winning opening corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 1 (starting opening signal output Is loaded (step A1405). Then, 1 is added to the loaded value to update it (step A1406), and it is checked whether the number of times of starting port signal output overflows (step A1407).

Then, when the number of start opening signal outputs does not overflow (the result of step A1407 is “N”), the game control device 600 updates the value of the number of start opening signal outputs after the update to the start opening signal output number area of RWM. (Step A1408).

After the processing of step A1408 is completed, or when the number of times the starting opening signal output overflows (result of step A1407 is "Y"), the game control device 600, the updating target corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored It is determined whether the number of special view reservations (starting memory) is less than the upper limit (step A1409).

When the number of special drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of step A1409 is “Y”), the game control device 600 sets information corresponding to the winning combination detected by the starting opening switch. Specifically, first, the number of the special figure reservations to be updated (for example, the number of special figure 1 reservations) is incremented by one (1).
Step A1410).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the special drawing reservation number (step A1411). The decoration special drawing reservation number command is composed of a MODE part and an ACTION part. At this time, the prefetch result corresponding to the newly generated start-up storage may be sent together with the decoration special drawing reservation number command. For example, a value indicating the prefetching result may be added to the ACTION portion of the decoration special drawing reservation number command.

Specifically, the game control device 600 first prepares the decoration special drawing reservation number command (MODE) of the starting opening switch to be monitored, and further, the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing reservation number Prepare for ACTION. Then, a command setting process for setting the prepared decoration special drawing reservation number command is executed (step A1412).

Next, the game control device 600 calculates the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated number of special drawing reservations (step A1413). Then, the big hit random number obtained in the process of step A 1404 is saved in the big hit random number save area of RWM (step A 1414). Furthermore, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A)
1415). Thereafter, the prepared jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number save area of the RWM (step A1416).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 extracts the fluctuation pattern random number, and saves the extracted value in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A1417). Specifically, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage areas. The fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are used, for example, to individually set the fluctuation patterns of the first half and the second half, or to execute a specific effect.

The variation pattern random numbers (variation patterns 1 to 3) for determining the variation pattern (including the execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach), etc. in the first or second special view variation display game are Unlike what is updated by the software of the random number generation circuit like the jackpot symbol random number, it is updated by the game control program. The update of the variation pattern random number is not limited to the update by the game control program, but may be updated by the hardware or software of the random number generation circuit.

Then, the game control device 600 loads a jackpot symbol random number or the like corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored saved in the RWM in the processing of step A1416, and executes the special view holding information determination processing (step A1418). For the details of the special view hold information determination process, FIG.
Will be described later. Thereafter, the special view start port switch common processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the game control device 600 does not have the special figure reserve number less than the upper limit (step A1)
The result of S 409 is “N”), and the decoration special drawing reservation number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step A 1419), and command setting processing is executed (step A 1420). Thereafter, the special view start port switch common processing is ended.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view reservation information determination process (step A1418) in the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 52) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view hold information determination process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining result related information (gaming result information) corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on each start storage.

First, the game control device 600 determines whether or not the execution condition of the pre-reading effect (notice) is satisfied (step A1501). The execution condition of the pre-reading effect is that, for example, when the gaming ball wins the first start winning opening 37, there is no common power support and no special gaming state. In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 38, always fulfill the execution condition of the pre-reading effect. In the case of the normal gaming state, it is also determined that the condition for transmitting the prefetch prohibition command, that is, the condition for executing the prefetching effect is not satisfied even if the number of times of execution of the variable display game is less than 8 after power failure recovery. It is also good. If the play control condition of the pre-reading effect is not satisfied (the result of step A1501 is “N”), the game control device 600 ends the special view hold information determination process.

In addition, when the result of the common drawing variation display game is hit in the normal gaming state (non-power support state), the common charge short open where the movable member 38a opens for a short time with a probability of 4/5, or In the specification in which the general electric power long opening is selected such that the movable member 38a is opened for a long time (0.5 + 5 seconds) with 5 probability, the prefetch memory is not read for the starting memory of To Pre-reading may be performed for the start memory of the special view 2 that has won the prize when the Fuden Long is released.

On the other hand, the game control device 600 determines whether the newly stored start memory is a big hit or not, when the condition for executing the prefetch effect is satisfied (the result of step A1501 is “Y”). The process is executed (step A1502). The big hit determination process determines whether or not the result of the variable display game according to the start memory is a big hit by determining whether the big hit random number value included in the pending start memory matches the big hit judgment value. judge.

The game control device 600 determines whether the determination result by the big hit determination process of step A1502 is a big hit (step A1503). If the determination result of the big hit determination process is not a big hit (the result of step A1503 is "N"), the out-of-stop stop symbol pattern is set as the stop symbol pattern (step A1506). And the process after step A1507 is performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (the result of step A1503 is “
Y "), game control control equipment 600, sets the big hit design random number check table which corresponds to the starting opening which wins as the table in order to specify the identification design at the time of big hit (step A150)
4). In the jackpot symbol random number check table, a judgment value of a random number representing a distribution ratio of whether or not a jackpot or a jackpot stop symbol pattern corresponding to the judgment value is defined.

Furthermore, the game control device 600 checks the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number check table set in the process of step A1504, acquires the corresponding jackpot stop symbol pattern, and sets it (step A1505).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 saves the big hit stop symbol pattern set in the process of step A1505 or the out-of-stop symbol pattern set in the process of step A1506 in the prefetch stop symbol stop pattern area (step A1507). Furthermore, prepare a prefetch symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol pattern (step A1508)
And command setting processing (step A1509).

Next, the game control device 600 executes a special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information set regarding the starting opening to be monitored (step A1510). Details of the special view information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a second half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the starting opening to be monitored in order to set the second half fluctuation pattern among the fluctuation modes in the special figure fluctuation display game (step A1510) The fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the whole fluctuation pattern is executed (step A1511). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. The variation pattern setting process may be defined for each result of the special figure variation display game, and the corresponding variation pattern setting process may be executed according to the result of the target figure variation display game.

Finally, the game control device 600 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number and the second half variation number set in the variation pattern setting process (step A1513).
The command setting process is executed (step A1514). After that, the processing for judging the special feature hold information is ended.

As described above, in the special view suspension information determination process, before executing the special view variation display game corresponding to the start storage, acquire the result of the special view variation display game and notify it to the effect control device 700. Is possible. The effect control device 700 changes the display mode of the start memory display displayed on the fluctuation display device 35, and the player is given a result of the special drawing fluctuation display game before the start timing of the special drawing fluctuation display game. To inform Here, the game control device 600
Functions as an advance determination unit, and the effect control device 700 functions as an advance notification unit.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine process (step A1210) in the special view game process described above will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special processing of the first embodiment of the present invention.

First, the gaming control device 600 determines whether the number of special views 2 pending (the number of second holding displays) is 0 (step A 1601). Furthermore, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step A16)
It is determined whether the result of 01 is “Y”) and the first hold display count (the number of special view 1 hold) is 0 (
Step A1606). As described above, by performing the special figure 2 suspension number check (step A 1601) prior to the special figure 1 suspension number check (step A 1606), it is more advantageous for the player than the first special figure variation display game. The second special view variable display game is preferentially executed.

When the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of step A 1601 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares the decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A 16
02) The command setting process is executed (step A1603). Furthermore, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing in order to execute the special figure fluctuation indicatory game is executed (step A1604). The details of the special view 2 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) for preparing a table (for the second special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A1605).
, Special figure usually end processing. The details of the special processing during processing transition setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, when game control control equipment 600, special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step A1606
The result is “N”), and the decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number is prepared (step A1607), and command setting processing is executed (step A1608). Further, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for executing the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (step A1609). The details of the special view 1 change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, the game control device 600 executes the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) to prepare a table (for the first special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process (step A1610).
, Special figure usually end processing. The details of the special processing during processing transition setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, the decoration special figure reservation number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 700 only when the number of reservations changes.

On the other hand, when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (the result of step A 1606 is “Y”), game control control device 600 determines whether or not the customer waiting demo has already been started (step A 1611)
). If the customer waiting demo has not been started, that is, it has not been started (step A16)
The result of 11 is "N", and the waiting for customer demonstration flag is saved in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A1612). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A 1613), and command setting processing is executed (step A 1614).

On the other hand, if the gaming control device 600 has already started the customer waiting demo (step A
Since the result of 1606 is “Y”), the waiting for customer demonstration flag is already set in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area, and the waiting for customer demonstration command has been sent to the effect control device 700, step A1.
Execute the process after 615.

Finally, the game control device 600 executes special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 for preparing a table for transitioning to special processing routine processing (step A 1615). Specifically, a process of setting a process number “0” corresponding to the special view ordinary process, a flag (big winning opening fraud monitoring information) defining the big winning opening fraud monitoring period, etc. is executed in the table. After that, the special view routine processing is finished.

[Special figure change start process]
Next, the details of the special figure fluctuation start process (step A1604, step A1609) in the special figure normal process described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure fluctuation start process according to the first embodiment of the present invention, wherein (A) is a special figure 1 fluctuation start process executed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game , (B) is a special figure 2 variation start process executed at the start of the second special figure variation display game. First, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is explained.

The game control device 600 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag (flag during fluctuation) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area of RWM (step A1701). Next, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting the big hit flag 1 is executed when the result of the first special view fluctuation display game corresponding to the first start storage is a big hit (step A1702).

Next, the game control device 600 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process corresponding to the setting of the first special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol) (step A1703). The details of the special view 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 executes a special figure information setting process of setting special figure information (step A1708). Details of the special view information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, the game control device 600 prepares a special figure 1 pattern setting information table in which information on a variation pattern (variation display time) for special figure 1 is set based on the random numbers stored as the start memory (step A1705). . Subsequently, fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting a fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed (step A1706). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Finally, the game control device 600 executes a variation start information setting process of setting information for starting the first special figure variation display game (step A1707), and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A1609) shown in (B) is the same procedure as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the process corresponding to the special figure 2 is executed instead of the special figure 1.

Next, the special figure stop symbol setting process in the special figure fluctuation start process which is mentioned earlier (step A1703
The details of step A1713) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 57 shows the first embodiment of the present invention.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of embodiment.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is set, that is, whether or not the result of the target figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit (step A1801a).
When the big hit flag 1 is set (the result of step A 1801a is “Y”), the random number from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area which corresponds to the number of holdings 1 that is, starting memory where fluctuation starts Load (step A1802a). Furthermore, the big hit design table for special figure 1 is set as a table in order to decide the stop design (step A1803a).

Next, the game control device 600 acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number acquired in the processing of step A1802a from the jackpot symbol table for special drawing 1 set in the processing of step A1803a, and acquires the stop symbol The number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A1804a).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 600 sets a big hit stop symbol information table corresponding to the current gaming state (step A1805a). Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained from the big hit stop symbol information table and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A1806a). Furthermore, the probability fluctuation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired,
It saves in the probability fluctuation determination flag area (step A1807a).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not set (the result of step A 1801a is “N”), the game control device 600 acquires the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection, and stops the acquired stop symbol number. Save in the symbol area (step A1808a). Furthermore, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A1809).
a).

When the processing of step A1807a or step A1809a is completed, the game control device 6
00 corresponds to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command table, and prepares the decoration special figure 1 command consisting of the ACTION section and the MODE section (step A1810a). further,
The decoration special drawing command acquired in the processing of step A 1810 a is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A 1811 a), and the command setting processing is executed (step A 1812).
a).

Furthermore, the game control device 600 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A1813a) and finally clears the jackpot symbol random number save area for special figure 1 to 0 (step A1814a) , The special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing ends.

Further, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 57 is a process similar to the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, in which the process corresponding to the special figure 2 is executed instead of the special figure 1. Do.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A1704, step A1714) in the special figure fluctuation start process described above will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure information setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether the gaming state is the short time state (step A1901). If the time saving state is not set (the result at step A1901 is "N"), the fluctuation pattern selection group information table at the normal time is set (step A1902). On the other hand, in the case of the time saving state (the result of step A1901 is “Y”), the fluctuation pattern selection group information table at the time of time saving is set (step A1903).

When the variation pattern selection group information table is set, the game control device 600 loads the number of special drawing reservations corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag from the set variation pattern selection group information table (step A1904). Further, fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the number of to-be- reserved special drawings is acquired and saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A1905).

As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the type of the special figure that starts the change (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
And, the variation distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including the information on the number of held displays about the type of the special view and the game state information including the information on whether or not it is the time saving state is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is used later to select a fluctuation group.

In addition, a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, first, select a fluctuation group, and further select one fluctuation pattern from among the fluctuation groups. It has become. When one variation pattern is selected, another random number may be newly obtained.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets a distribution base pointer table (step A1).
906), The distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop design pattern is acquired (step A19)
07). Furthermore, the effect mode number is added to the acquired distribution base pointer (step A)
1908) The value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A1909), and the special map information setting process is ended.

Thereby, the fluctuation distribution information 2 acquired based on the stop symbol pattern information and the presentation mode information is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is later used to select a fluctuation group. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special view variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, fluctuation pattern setting processing in the special drawing fluctuation start processing described above (step A1706)
The details of step A1716) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

When the variation pattern setting process is started, the game control device 600 first sets a variation group selection address table (step A2001), and acquires and prepares an address of a second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 (Step A2002).

Then, the game control device 600 determines whether the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A2003). If the effect mode number is not less than 2 (the result of step A 2003 is “N”), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a disengaging stop symbol pattern (step A 2004). Then, when the stop symbol pattern is not the disengaging stop symbol pattern (the result of step A 2004 is “N”), the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (Step A
2007).

On the other hand, when the effect mode number is less than 2 (step A200)
If the result of 3 is “Y”) or the stop symbol pattern is a disengaging stop symbol pattern (result of step A2004 is “Y”), the second half fluctuation group table prepared by the processing of step A2002 is subjected to fluctuation distribution The address of the table corresponding to the information 1 is acquired (step A2005). Next, prepare the obtained address as the address of the second half fluctuation group (
Step A2006): Load and prepare the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (step A2007).

In addition, when the effect mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is a disengaging stop symbol pattern, the address is also added taking into consideration the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the number-of-holds information which is information regarding the number of held displays. The acquisition mode of the fluctuation pattern is made different depending on the number of pending display by acquiring.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes 2-byte distribution processing for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special view variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 (step A2008). Then, the address of the second-half variation selection table selected by 2-byte distribution processing is acquired and prepared (step A2009). Further, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1) and prepared (step A2010).

Furthermore, the game control device 600 executes a sorting process of selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (step A2011). Then, the latter half fluctuation number selected by the distribution processing is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A2012). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the gaming control device 600 sets the first half fluctuation group table (step A201).
3) A table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the fluctuation distribution information 2 (including the determined second half fluctuation number) (step A2014). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A2015), and the random number is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) (step A2016) ).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 executes sorting processing for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 ( Step A 2017). Then, the first half variation number selected by the distribution process is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A20).
18) Finish the fluctuation pattern setting process. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, fluctuation start information setting processing in the special drawing fluctuation start processing described above (step A1707)
The details of step A1717) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

When the change start information setting process is started, the game control device 600 first clears the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step A2101). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A2102), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A2103). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A2104), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A210).
5).

And game control control equipment 600 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (step A2106), saves the addition value in the special figure game processing timer territory (step A2107)
. After that, prepare a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (step A21).
08), prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (step A)
2109), and performs command setting processing (step A2110).

Next, the gaming control device 600 updates the number of special drawing reservations corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag by 1 (step A2111), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (step A2112). Furthermore, the random number storage area is shifted (step A2113)
Clears the free space after shift 0 (step A2114).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 clears the stop extension information area as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special view variation display game (step A2115). The stop symbol pattern is a disengaging stop symbol pattern (the result of step A2116 is “Y”), the effect mode number is 3 (the result of step A2117 is “Y”), and the remaining number of rotations in the effect mode ( If the number of games) is 1 (the result of step A2118 is “
It is determined whether or not Y) is in the special figure height probability (high probability state) (step A2119).

If the game control device 600 is not in the special figure height probability (result of step A2119 is "
N '), save stop extension information 1 in the stop extension information area (step A2120), prepare a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information (step A2122), perform command setting processing (step A2123), and change The start information setting process ends. As a result, the stop time is set to the special view extension display time 1 (first extension stop time) which is longer than the normal special view display time (normal stop time).

Further, when the special figure height probability is in progress (the result of step A 2119 is “Y”), the game control device 600 saves the stop extension information 2 in the stop extension information area (step A 2121).
. Then, a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A2122),
The command setting process is executed (step A2123). Thereafter, the variation start information setting process is ended. Thus, the special drawing extension display time 2 in which the stop time is extended than the special drawing display time
It is set to (the second extension stop time).

On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not the disengaging stop symbol pattern (the result of step A 2116 is “N”), the game control device 600 does not have the effect mode number 3 (step A 2).
If the result of step 117 is "N" or the remaining number of rotations (number of games) in effect mode 2 is not 1 (the result of step A2118 is "N"), the variation start information setting process is ended. In this case, the extension of the stop time is not set, and the normal stop time is set.

As described above, the stop time of the special view variation display game is set at the start of the special view variation display game based on the result of the special view variation display game, whether or not it is the specific rotation speed, and the state of the effect mode. It is supposed to be As a result, for example, it is possible to set continuous effects in the fluctuation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is,
The game control device 600 is a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 600). Further, the game control device 600 is a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 700, and the effect control device 700 determines the variation pattern determined based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. In accordance with this, detailed effect contents in the decoration special view variable display game are set. As information on the start of these special view variation display games, a decoration special view suspension number command including information on the number of suspension display (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 700 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the processing in the effect control device 700 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special chart during processing transition setting process]
Next, the process for setting process transition during special figure fluctuation in the special figure ordinary process described above (step A160)
5, the details of step A1610) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special processing during process transition setting processing of the first embodiment of the present invention, where (A) is the first special view fluctuation display game, and (B) is the second. This is the case of the special view variable display game. First, the case of the first special view variable display game will be described.

The game control device 600 first sets "1" as the processing number (step A2201).
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A2202).

Then, the gaming control device 600 clears the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A220).
3) Save the signal related to the start of fluctuation of Special Figure 1 in the test signal output data area (step A2204). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A2205), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 flickering control timer area For example, 200 ms is set (step A2206). After that, the process transition setting process (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation is ended.

Also in the case of the second special view variable display game shown in (B), the procedure is the same as the case of the first special view change display game, and the process corresponding to the special view 2 is executed instead of the special view 1 Be done.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, details of the special figure variation in-progress process (step A1211) in the special figure game process described above will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure variation processing of the first embodiment of the present invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A2301). If there is no stop extension information (the result at step A 2301 is “N”), the normal feature map display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special feature game processing timer area (step A 2302). Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing being displayed is executed (step A2306), and the processing to display special drawing is ended.

In addition, when there is stop extension information (the result of step A 2301 is “Y”), the game control device 600 determines whether or not it is stop extension information 1 (step A 2303). When it is the stop extension information 1 (the result of step A 2303 is “Y”), the special view extension display time 1 (
For example, save 3500 ms) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2304)
. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing being displayed is executed (step A2306), and the processing to display special drawing is ended.

On the other hand, if the game control device 600 is not the stop extension information 1 (the result of step A 2303 is “N”), that is, if it is the stop extension information 2, the special view extension display time 2 (for example 14
300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A2305). Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing being displayed is executed (step A2306), and the processing to display special drawing is ended. That is, the game control device 600 is configured as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
Next, the processing for setting processing transition during processing for setting special processing in the processing for changing special processing described above (step A23)
The details of 06) will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing transition setting process during special image display according to the first embodiment of this invention.

At first, the game control device 600 sets the processing number "2" corresponding to the processing during the special figure display (step A2401), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A24).
02).

Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal relating to the end of fluctuation in the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 in the test signal output data area (step A 2403, step A 2404), and outputs the special drawing fluctuation display game to the external information terminal. The control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area corresponding to the execution number of (step A2405).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 controls the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop at the special view 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51. (Step A2406). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the stop of the change in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area (step A2407) ), Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A1212) in the special view game process described above will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during special view display according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control apparatus 600 first loads the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special view 2 fluctuation start process (step A 2501), and clears the big hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A 2502). Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A2503).

If the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of step A 2503 is “Y”), the game control device 600 clears the big hit flag 1 area of RWM (step A)
2508). Then, the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A2509).

On the other hand, if the loaded big hit flag 2 is not a big hit, the game control device 600
The result of step A 2503 loads the big hit flag 1 set by big hit flag 1 setting processing in special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A 2504), and clears the big hit flag 1 area of RWM (step A 2505) ). Subsequently, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A2506).

If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A2506)
The result is “Y”), and the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special view variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A2507).

If the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is a big hit, the game control device 600 acquires the stop symbol number from the stop symbol area (step A 2510). And it is determined whether it is stop symbol number (the 1st special result probability variation big hit) where the number of rounds of big hit becomes fixed (step A 2511)
). When the number of rounds is not the fixed stop symbol number which becomes fixed (the result of step A 2511 is “N
If it is a stop symbol number (2nd special result normal big hit and 2nd special result probability variation big hit) which can select round number of big hit, execute big hit round decision processing transition setting processing (step A 2512) After that, the processing is ended during the special view display. The details of the jackpot round determination process transition setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the case of the stop symbol number that the number of rounds becomes fixed (the result of step A 2511 is “N”), the game control device 600 prepares the upper limit number of rounds for fixing (16 rounds) (step A 2513) . Then, the process transfer setting process 1 during fanfare / interval is executed (step A 2514), and then the special figure display process is ended. The details of the fanfare / interval process shift setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A2)
If the result of 506 is "N", the effect mode information check process related to the setting of the effect mode is executed (step A2516), and the time reduction change number update process of managing the number of times of execution of the special view change display game to be short Are executed (step A2517). Then, the special view processing shift setting process is executed (step A 2517), and the special view display process is ended thereafter. The number of times of execution of the time saving state may be managed at the start of fluctuation.

[Big hit round decision processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot round determination process shift setting process (step A 2512) in the special figure display process described above will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit round determination process shift setting process of the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first sets "3" as the processing number (step A7201).
The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A7202).

Then, the game control device 600 prepares a round determination start command (step A72).
03), execute command setting processing (step A7204). After that, the big hit round decision processing shift setting processing ends. The round determination start command is a command for notifying the effect control device 700 that the lottery for the number of rounds of the big hit round will be performed. Upon receiving the round determination start command, the effect control device 700 starts the effect of determining the big hit round.

[Big hit round decision processing]
Next, the jackpot round determination process in the special view game process described above (step A1213)
The details of) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of a procedure of jackpot round determination processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control apparatus 600 first loads the passage flag set in the passage flag storage area in the passage gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 50) (step A7301), and determines whether the passage flag is set (step A7301) A7302). If the passage flag is not set (the result of step A 7302 is “N”), it is not necessary to determine the big hit round, so the big hit round determination process is ended.

When the passage flag is set (the result of step A7302 is "Y"), the game control device 600 determines whether or not the set passage flag is the first (variation) passage flag ( Step A7303). In the case of the first (variation) passage flag (step A 730
The round distribution table 1 (FIG. 41 (C)) is set in which the result of 3 is “Y”), and 5 rounds or 15 rounds are selected on a one-to-one basis (step A2704). On the other hand, if it is not the first (variation) passage flag (the result of step A7303 is "N"), that is, if the second (fixed) passage flag is set, the round distribution table for which 10 rounds are selected 2 (
FIG. 41D is set (step A2705). The number of rounds may be set in the round distribution table 2 so that the expected value (average value) of the execution rounds is 10 rounds.

When the round distribution table is set, the game control device 600 loads the round determination random number set in the passing gate switch monitoring process from the round random number storage area (step A2706). Further, based on the loaded round determination random number, the corresponding round number is acquired from the set round distribution table (step A2707).

Furthermore, the game control device 600 prepares a round number determination command corresponding to the acquired round number (step A2708), and executes a command setting process (step A2709).
). Further, the upper limit number of rounds (5 rounds, 10 rounds, or 15 rounds) corresponding to the obtained number of rounds is prepared (step A 2710), and fanfare / interval process transition setting processing 1 is executed (step A 2514) . Thereafter, the processing is ended while displaying the special view. The details of the fanfare / interval process shift setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the fanfare in the special view display processing and the big hit round determination processing described above
The details of the during-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 2514, step A 7311) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transfer setting processing during fanfare / interval according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first acquires the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and saves it in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A 2801). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and the round LE of RWM
Save to the D pointer area (step A2802). Thus, the number of rounds display unit 59
The number of rounds of the big hit is displayed on.

Next, the game control device 600 RWM the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern
The special command command area is loaded from the command area and prepared (step A2803), and the command setting process is executed (step A2804). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A2805), and the command setting process Execute (Step A
2806).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process (step A2807), and the command The setting process is executed (step A2808).

Next, the game control device 600 saves the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common drawing variation display game and the special drawing variation display game in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step A2809). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 2810).

Then, the game control device 600 clears the special winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (the first special variation winning device 41 or the second special changing winning device 42) corresponding to the special winning opening information.
Step A2811). Further, the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information (step A2812).

Next, the game control device 600 loads the special view game mode flag (step A 281).
3) Save the loaded flag in the special view game mode flag save area (step A2)
814). As a result, information of the effect mode when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Subsequently, the game control device 600 sets “4” which is a processing number corresponding to the fanfare / interval processing (step A2815), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A2816).

Next, the game control device 600 saves a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) in the external information output data area (step A2817), and sets a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state to the test signal output data area. Save (step A2818).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 clears the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A2819), and saves the number in the low probability state in the game state display number area (step A2820). . Furthermore, a general drawing low probability & general support no flag is saved in the general drawing game mode flag area (step A2821).

Then, the game control device 600 clears the variation symbol determination flag area (step A28).
22) Further, the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) corresponding to the display of the high probability state (step A2823).
Then, the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A2824).

Next, the game control device 600 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 700 at the time of power failure recovery (step A2825), and executes in time saving state The time reduction variation number area for managing the number of possible special figure variation display games is cleared (step A2826). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are obtained.

Thereafter, the game control device 600 saves the effect mode 1 number in the effect mode number area (step A2827), and clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A2828). Then, the no update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A2829), and the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A283).
0). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the effect mode information check process in the special map display process described above (step A25)
The details of 15) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of effect mode information check processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no update code (step A2901). If the next mode transition information is the no update code (the result at step A2901 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of the special figure variation display game that has been executed, and, for example, when the effect mode to continue until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected It is.

Further, when the next mode transition information is not the no update code (the result of step A 2901 is “N”), the game control device 600 has the effect remaining number which is the number of executable times of the special view fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode. The rotation number is updated by -1 (step A2902). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect remaining number of rotations has become 0 (step A2903).

When the game effect control number of revolutions becomes 0 (the result of step A 2903 is “Y”), that is, when changing the game mode from the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 600 performs the game mode information address A table is set (step A2904), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A2905).

Then, the game control device 600 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred and saves it in the effect mode number area (step A2906), acquires the effect remaining number of rotations of the effect mode to transfer, and the effect remaining speed region (Step A2907). Further, next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode shift information area (step A2908).

After that, the game control device 600 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (
Step A2909) Save the command in the effect mode command area (Step A2)
910). Thereafter, the command setting process is executed (step A2911), and the effect mode information check process is ended.

On the other hand, when the effect remaining rotation speed is not 0 (the result of step A2903 is "N"), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure fluctuation display game, game control control device 600, the effect remaining It is determined whether the number of revolutions is a prescribed number of revolutions (for example, eight times) (step A2912).

If the game control control device 600 does not have the effect remaining rotation speed at the specified rotation speed (step A 29
The result of 12 is “N”, and the presentation mode information check process ends. On the other hand, if the effect remaining number of rotations is the specified number of rotations (the result at step A2912 is "Y"), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A2913), and the command setting process is executed (step A)
2914). Thereafter, the presentation mode information check process is ended. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode.

As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control device 600, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time reduction variation update process]
Next, the processing for updating the number of times for shortening time change in the processing during the special map display described above (step A251)
The details of 6) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time shortening variation number updating process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first determines whether or not the special figure height probability (high probability state) is in progress (
Step A3001). If the special drawing height probability is in progress (the result at step A3001 is “Y
“), End the time reduction change number update process.

On the other hand, if the special figure height probability is not in progress (the result of step A3001 is "N"), game control control device 600 determines whether or not special figure time reduction (time reduction state) is in progress (step A3002)
. When the special drawing time is not being reduced (the result of Step A3002 is “N”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. In addition, if the special drawing time is short (the result of step A3002
Y "), time reduction variation number of times to manage the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game to be in a short time state-
1 is updated (step A3003), and it is determined whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations has become 0 (step A3004).

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of step A3004 is "N"), that is, if the time saving state continues even in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 600 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations. Finish. In addition, when the number of time shortening fluctuations is 0 (step A)
If the result of 3004 is "Y", that is, if the time saving state ends in the current special figure fluctuation display game, prepare the probability information command (time reduction end) (step A3005), and execute the command setting process (A Step A3006). Thereafter, the time saving end setting process is executed (step A3007), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Time saving end setting process]
Next, the time reduction end setting process in the above-described time reduction variation number update process (step A30)
The details of 07) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving end setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the game control device 600 saves a signal regarding the end of time saving in the external information output data area (step A3101), and further saves a signal regarding the end of time saving in the test signal output data area (step A3102).

Next, the gaming control device 600 saves the number in the low probability in the gaming state display number area (step A3103), and saves the common drawing low probability & general support no flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A3104). Furthermore, the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A3105), and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A3106). The normal process shift setting process 2 (at the time saving end) is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (step A1217) in the special view game process described above will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

In the game control apparatus 600, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result triggered to execute the special game state this time is set when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (step A3201).

If the game control device 600 does not have high probability data (the result of step A 3201 is “
N "), the big hit end setting processing 1 is executed (step A3202). On the other hand, if the data is high probability data (result of step A3201 is “Y”), big hit end setting processing 2 is executed (step A3203).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special view game mode flag (step A3204), and executes a command setting process (step A3205).
.

Next, in order to save information necessary for managing the effect mode, the game control device 600 first sets an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A3).
206). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A3207). Furthermore, the effect residual rotation number of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotational number region (step A3208), and the next mode transition of the effect mode set after the special gaming state ends Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A3209).

After that, the game control device 600 prepares a command corresponding to the new effect mode number (
Step A3210), save the command in the effect mode command area (step A32)
11) The command setting process is executed (step A3212). Finally, the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 is executed (step A3213), and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting processing]
Next, the big hit end setting process 1 in the big hit end process mentioned above (step A3202)
The details of the big hit end setting process 2 (step A3203) will be described. Figure 72 shows
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (
A) shows a big hit end setting process 1 and (B) shows a big hit end setting process 2.

First, the big hit end setting process 1 will be described. The game control device 600 first saves the signal related to the start of time saving in the external information output data area (step A3301), and saves the signal related to the start of time short in the test signal output data area (step A3302).

Next, the game control device 600 saves the common drawing high probability & common charge support flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A3303), and saves the special drawing low probability & time short flag in the special drawing game mode flag area. (Step A3304). Thereafter, save the probability information command (time reduction) in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A3305), save the time reduction change frequency initial value (for example 70) in the time reduction change frequency area (step A3306), and end the big hit The setting process 1 ends.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value (for example, 70) of the short time fluctuation count in the short time fluctuation count area, the short time state is ended by execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

Next, the big hit end setting process 2 will be described. The game control device 600 first saves the signal related to the start of the high probability in the external information output data area (step A3311), and saves the signal related to the start of the high probability in the test signal output data area (step A3312)
.

Next, the game control device 600 saves the common drawing high probability & common charge support flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A3313), and saves the special drawing high probability & time short flag in the special drawing game mode flag area. (Step A3314). Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A3315), the time shortening fluctuation number area is cleared (step A3316), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until the derivation of the next special result mode is achieved. That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 600 extends the period in which the movable member 38a of the second start winning opening 38 is opened for a predetermined predetermined period, thereby reducing the specific game state (time reduction state). It constitutes a specific game state occurrence control means that can be generated.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A32) in the big hit end process mentioned above
The details of 13) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the procedure of the big hit end setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The game control device 600 first sets "0" as a process number corresponding to the special figure normal process (step A3401), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A).
3402).

Thereafter, the game control device 600 saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit in the external information output data area (step A3403), and saves a signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (step A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 600 clears the information of the probability variation determination flag area (step A3405), and clears the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (step A3406). Further, the number in the time zone is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A3407).

Then, the gaming control device 600 saves the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A3408). Finally, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A3409), and the special view processing shift setting processing 3 is ended.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (step A1219, step A1221) in the special view game process described above will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol variation control processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. The symbol variation control process is the first special figure or the second
It is a process which performs control of change of special symbols, such as a special figure, and setup of display data of a special symbol.

The game control device 600 first checks whether the special figure fluctuation control flag corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) among the first special figure and the second special figure is changing. (Step A
3501) It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A 3502).

And, when the game control device 600 is in the special figure fluctuation flag is being changed (the result of step A3502 is “Y”), the symbol display corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) of the control object A table (for variation) is acquired (step A3503). Then, of the first special view and the second special view, the blinking control timer corresponding to the special view (for example, the first special view) to be controlled is updated by −1 (
Step A3504) It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time has expired (Step A3505).

When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A3505)
The result of “Y” saves the initial value of the blinking control timer in the blinking control timer area of the control target (
Step A3506), among the first special view and the second special view, the variation symbol number corresponding to the special view (for example, the first special view) to be controlled is updated by +1 (step A3507).

In addition, after the processing of step A3507 ends, or when the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (the result of step A3505 is “N”), the game control device 600 corresponds to the value of the target variable symbol number area. Display data to be acquired (step A3508). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A3511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the game control device 600 does not change the flag during the special figure change (step A)
The result of 3502 is "N" and the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the special figure (for example, the first special figure) to be controlled is acquired (step A3509). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A3510). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A3511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

By the above process, the special figure display corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. The Rukoto.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step A1112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 23, and the start or the end of the fraud notification is set.

From the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 23 and taken into the input port 622a, the game control device 600 first determines whether an abnormal magnetism has been detected (step A3601). When the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 23) is on (step A3601)
When the result of “Y” is detected, ie, abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step A3602), and the timer is timed up or not. It is determined (step A3603).

The game control device 600, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer time up (step A36
If the result of step 03 is "Y", that is, abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step A3604). Further, the magnet fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step A3605). Then, a command of magnet irregularity notification is prepared (step A3606), and a magnet irregularity occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet irregularity flag (step A3607).

Further, the game control device 600 determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step A3613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 23 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, if the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 23) is not on (the result of step A3601 is "N"), that is, if the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control device 600 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. (Step A3608).

Furthermore, after the processing of step A3608 is completed, or when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (the result of step A3603 is “N”), the game control device 600 defines a notification time of magnet fraud. If the fraud notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is 0 (step A3610).

If the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is not 0 (step A3610)
If the result is “N”, that is, the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (the result of step A 3610 is “Y
), That is, when the time is up or has already been up, and when the period of fraud notification ends or when the fraud notification is not performed from the beginning, prepare a command of magnet fraud notification termination. (Step A3611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step A3612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step A3613).

Then, if the game controller 600 determines that the magnet fraud flag prepared in the process of step A3607 or step A3612 matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step A36)
The result of 13 is “Y”), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, if the values do not match (
The result of step A3613 is "N", and the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step A3614), and the command setting process is executed (step A3615)
. Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.

[Radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step A1113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the radio wave fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 24, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

First, the game control device 600 turns on the radio wave sensor 24 from the state of the detection signal which is output from the radio wave sensor 24 and taken into the input port 622a via the proximity I / F 621a,
That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave has been detected (step A3701).
If the radio wave sensor is on (the result at step A3701 is "Y"), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step A3702).

Further, the game control device 600 prepares a command of radio wave irregularity notification (step A370).
3) The radio wave fraud occurrence flag is set as the radio wave fraud flag (step A3704).

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (result of step A3701 is "N"), that is, when the game control device 600 does not detect an abnormal radio wave, the radio wave informing notification defining the notification time of the radio wave injustice. If the timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero.

Then, the game control device 600 determines whether the value of the radio wave injustice timer is 0 (step A3706). If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (the result of step A 3706 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave improper monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (step A3)
If the result of 706 is “Y”), that is, the time is up or the time is already up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or if the informing notification is not performed from the beginning, the radio wave is unfair. A command for ending the notification is prepared (step A3707), and the radio wave fraud cancellation flag is set as the radio wave fraud flag (step A3708).

When the radio wave fraud flag is set in the process of step A3704 or step A3708,
The game control device 600 determines whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag region (step A3709). That is, unlike the case of the magnetic fraud, in the case of the radio wave fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

If the prepared radio wave injustice flag matches the value of the radio wave injustice flag area (the result of step A 3709 is “Y”), the game control device 600 ends the radio wave injustice monitoring process. on the other hand,
If the values do not match (the result at step A3709 is "N"), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step A3710), and the command setting process is executed (step A3711). Thereafter, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.

The above is the description of the process executed by the game control device 600 (main board). continue,
The effect control executed based on the command received from the game control device 600 will be described. The effect control is executed by the effect control device 700 (sub substrate).

[1st CPU main process (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main process performed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 77 is a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) of the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of this invention
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process performed by 710. FIG. The main processing is executed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 prohibits an interrupt (step B1001). next,
Various initialization processing is executed (step B1003). Specifically, the work area RAM
711 is cleared to 0, and CPU initialization processing is executed. Furthermore, initial values necessary for execution of various processes are set in the RAM 711 and random number initialization processing is executed.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 activates various interrupt timers for generating an interrupt at a predetermined timing (for example, one millisecond) (step B1003), and permits the interrupt (step B1004). An interrupt process such as receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 600 is executed at an interrupt generation timing. Details of the interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main control microcomputer 710 clears the WDT (watch dock timer) (step B1005). The WDT is started by the CPU initialization process included in the above-described initialization process,
Monitor whether the CPU is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a predetermined period, the WDT times up and the CPU is reset.

Then, the main control microcomputer 710 causes the player to perform the effect button 17 (selection button 29).
The effect button input process of detecting the operation signal of and generating the detected signal (input information) is executed (step B1006). In addition, game control command analysis processing for analyzing and specifying the game control command received from the game control device 600 is executed (step B1007). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command has been correctly received in the reception buffer by an interrupt, and if it can be received, the division is performed in order to use the received command in the 1st scene control process (step B1009) or the like. Do.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes test mode processing (step B1008).
). The test mode process receives an inspection command at the time of inspection at the time of shipment from the factory, and inspects lighting and the like of the LED. Therefore, test mode processing is performed when the CPU is inspected at the time of factory shipment. In addition, when processing such as display, sound output, light emission, etc. is actually required, sound control processing (step B1012), decoration control processing (step B1013) described later,
The motor / solenoid (SOL) control process (step B1014) is performed.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 analyzes the game control command (step B1007).
Based on the control command analyzed in step b)) (hereinafter referred to as “main display device”
) Or 1st scene control processing for controlling a scene (display content) to be displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B1009). In 1st scene control processing, the scene involved in the progress of the game is controlled. The details of the 1st scene control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 executes gaming machine error monitoring processing for monitoring the occurrence of an abnormality in the gaming machine 1 (step B1010). In addition to the abnormality relating to the effect control device 700, when a command instructing error notification is received from the game control device 600, predetermined processing such as light emission of the notification LED, screen display and alarm sound output is executed. The actual notification is a sound control process (step B1012), which will be described later, and a decoration control process (step B101).
3) Executed in the motor / solenoid (SOL) control process (step B1014).

Then, the main control microcomputer 710 edits a command to be sent to the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720, and executes effect command editing processing to be written in a predetermined register (see FIG.
Step B1011).

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 10 (step B1012). In addition, decoration devices such as LED (panel decoration device 4
5. Perform decoration control processing to control the frame decoration device 21) (step B1013), and further provide a rendering device such as a motorized part or a movable illumination driven by a motor and a solenoid (panel effect device 4
6. Execute motor / SOL control processing for controlling the frame effect device 22) (step B101)
4).

Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a random number update process for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers (step B1015), and returns to the process of step B1005. Thereafter, the processing from step B1005 to step B1015 is repeated.

[Interrupt process (effect control device)]
Subsequently, interrupt processing executed by the timer at predetermined intervals will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of interrupt processing in the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The effect control device 700 first executes timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (
Step B1101).

Subsequently, the effect control device 700 monitors an external signal input, and executes an input process for receiving the input (step B1102). For example, a signal input by operating the effect button 17 is detected, and the input of the signal is received.

Furthermore, the effect control device 700 outputs an image instructed by the 1st scene control process display control process (step B1009 of FIG. 77) from the main display device 35 or is instructed by the sound control process (step B1012 of FIG. 77). An output process of outputting the sound effect, the notification sound, and the like to the speaker 10 is executed (step B1103).

Finally, the effect control device 700 monitors the input of the main command transmitted from the game control device 600, executes main command reception processing for receiving the main command (step B1104), and ends the interrupt processing.

[2nd CPU main process (effect control device)]
Subsequently, the details of the other main process executed by the effect control device 700 will be described. FIG. 79 shows the image control microcomputer (FIG. 79) of the effect control device 700 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
4 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing executed by the (2nd CPU) 720. The 2nd CPU main processing is executed when the gaming machine 1 is powered on.

The image control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 720 first executes CPU initialization processing (see FIG.
Step B1201). Then, the RAM 721, which is a work area, is cleared to 0 (step B1202), and an initial value required to execute various processing is set in the RAM 721 (step B1).
203). Then, VDP initialization processing for initializing a graphic processor that performs image processing is executed (step B1204). Next, various interrupts such as V blank interrupt are permitted (step B1205).

Further, the video control microcomputer 720 executes initialization processing of various control processing (step B1206). In initialization processing of various control processing, initialization of a variable used in each control processing to be described later is performed. For example, the background of the image displayed on the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480) is initialized, or the arrangement of symbols is initialized. Then, the screen drawing of the main display device 35 (or the sub display device 480) is permitted (step B1207).

Thereafter, the image control microcomputer 720 clears (initializes) the system cycle waiting flag (step B1208), and waits until the system cycle waiting flag is set to 1 (step B1209).

When the system cycle wait flag is set to 1 (the result at step B 1209 is “Y”), the image control microcomputer 720 determines whether the image control microcomputer 720 is operating normally or not. Clear the watchdog timer (step B1210)
. The video control microcomputer 720 is reset when a predetermined time elapses without the WDT being cleared.

Subsequently, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a reception command check process (step B1211). In the reception command check process, a command transmitted from the game control device 600 and received via the main control microcomputer 710 is specified, and division is performed according to the process to be executed thereafter.

Next, the image control microcomputer 720 controls the main display 35 (or the sub display 480).
The second scene control process is executed to determine the contents to be displayed on the screen (step B1212). Specifically, in the 2nd scene control process, a notice character or the like is set, or the priority of the displayed character is determined.

Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes background processing for displaying a background according to the gaming state and the reach scene (step B1213). Subsequently, the variable display process is performed to perform display control regarding the variable display (step B1214). Further, a hold display process is performed to perform a hold display based on the hold effect information stored in the prefetch storage area in the prefetch command reception process described above (step B1215).

Next, the video control microcomputer 720 executes a customer waiting demonstration process for setting a customer waiting demonstration background after a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after receiving the customer waiting demonstration command (step B).
1216).

Finally, the microcomputer 720 for image control uses the data stored in the image ROM 557 as a RAM.
To the main display unit 35 (or the sub display unit 480) (step B1217), and the process returns to step B1208. Thereafter, the processing from step B1208 to step B1217 is repeated.

[1st scene control process]
Next, 1st scene control processing in 1st main processing described above (step B1009)
The details of) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 1st scene control processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether the gaming machine 1 is in the testing mode (step B1301). In the case of the mode under test (the result of step B1301 is “Y
'), 1st scene control processing ends.

When the gaming machine 1 is not in the test mode (step B1), the main control microcomputer 710
It is determined whether the result of 301 is “N”) and the scene change command transmitted from the game control device 600 has been received (step B1302). If the scene change command has not been received (the result at step B1302 is "N"), the processing at step B1307 and subsequent steps is executed.

When the main control microcomputer 710 receives a scene change command (step B)
The result of 1302 gets "Y" and updates the (current) gaming state (step B130)
3). Furthermore, it is determined whether a valid command has been received (step B1304)
. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the scene of the change destination is consistent with the current gaming state. If the main control microcomputer 710 has not received a valid command (step B1304)
The result of step S1307 is “N”), and the processing after step B1307 is executed.

When the main control microcomputer 710 receives a valid command (step B1304)
Of the received command is saved in the memory (step B1305). Further, the effect request flag is set (step B1306). The effect request flag is a flag indicating that it is time to change the scene, and a process according to whether or not the effect request flag is set is executed in a process during fluctuation (step B1311) described later.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process according to the identifier of the received command (step B1307).

When the received command is the “power on command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes the power on process (step B1308). In the power on process, control of a screen displayed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on is performed.

When the received command is a "power failure recovery command", the main control microcomputer 710 executes a power failure recovery process (step B1309). In the power failure recovery process, control of a screen displayed when the gaming machine 1 recovers from a power failure is performed. If the customer is in a wait state when a power failure occurs, a wait process is performed.

When the received command is the “wait for customer demo command”, the main control microcomputer 710
The customer waiting process is executed (step B1310). In the customer waiting process, control of a screen displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display game was last executed is performed. Details of the customer waiting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the received command is the “variation pattern command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process during variation (step B1311). In the fluctuation processing, information necessary for displaying a scene according to the set fluctuation pattern is acquired, and effect control corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern is performed. Details of the during-variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the received command is the "design stop command", the main control microcomputer 710 executes the symbol stop process (step B1312). In the symbol stop process, the variable display is stopped with the designated identification symbol.

When the received command is the “round determination start command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes the process of determining the big hit round (step B 1313). In the big hit round decision processing, the result of the variable display game is the second special result big hit, and a process for selecting the number of big hit rounds is performed. Details of the process during the big hit round determination will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the received command is the "fanfare command", the main control microcomputer 710 executes the big hit fanfare process (step B1314). In the big hit fanfare process, a fanfare corresponding to the generated big hit is output.

When the received command is the “large entry open n-th command”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process during the big hit round (step B1315). In the middle hit processing, effect control is performed during each round in the special game state.

If the received command is an "interval command", the main control microcomputer 710 executes a big hit interval process (step B1316). In the jackpot interval processing, effect control between each round in the special game state is performed.

When the received command is the "ending command", the main control microcomputer 710 executes the big hit ending process (step B1317). In the big hit ending process, effect control is performed when the special game state is over.

When the execution of the process based on each command is completed, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a pending number command reception process (step B1318). The pending number command is a command to be notified of the updated pending number, and the pending number command reception process updates the pending display and the like based on the received pending number.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes decoration special command reception processing (step B 1319). The decoration special drawing command reception process is a process of receiving the decoration special drawing command transmitted prior to the change pattern command at the start of the change.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes an advance determination command reception process (step B).
1320). The prior determination command reception process is a process of setting a pending display effect or the like based on the advance effect pattern command including the fall, promotion, or fall promotion, or the advance effect variation command.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes probability information command reception processing (step B).
1321). The probability information command reception process is a process of setting a gaming state such as an internal probability based on the received probability information command. The probability information command includes, for example, a high probability / time shortening command, a low probability / time shortening command, a low probability / non-support command, and the like.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a right-handed warning command reception process (step B1322). In the right-handed warning command reception process, the main display unit 35 or the sub-display unit 4 is used when the player makes a right-handed strike other than the timing for performing a right-handed hit such as when a big hit round is determined.
This is processing for displaying a warning on 80 and the like. Details of the right-handed warning command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the right-handed warning command reception process ends, the 1st scene control process ends, and the process returns to the 1st main process.

  Next, the display of the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 will be described.

[Screen display (main display device / sub display device)]
FIG. 81 is a view showing an example of display contents of the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, wherein (A) shows waiting for customers and (B) shows other than waiting for customers. Is shown.

In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in (A), in the customer waiting state, only the minimum display is performed on the main display device 35 in order to reduce the power consumption. Yes (energy saving mode). For example, a display showing that power consumption is reduced by minimizing the brightness of the display screen (“saving energy.”) Or a display showing a method of returning to the normal screen (“Returning by touch on the handle or button operation I am doing.

At this time, on the sub display device 480, a demonstration display including a customer waiting demo image (video), model information (model name, jackpot probability, probability variation ratio, etc.) and the like is performed. When returning from the energy saving mode, the demonstration display (the customer waiting demonstration image) may be output to the main display device 35.
At this time, in the sub display device 480, only the model information may be displayed, or an image different from that of the main display device 35 may be displayed. Although the sub display device 480 is not turned off even in the energy saving mode, since the screen size is smaller than that of the main display device 35, power consumption can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in (B), in the case other than the customer waiting state, for example, when the variable display game is being executed, the identification symbol (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) is variably displayed. At this time,
The inside decoration design may be displayed smaller than other identification design (left decoration design, right decoration design).

In addition, an effect display when a reach occurs and an error display when an error occurs are also performed. In the lower part of the screen of the main display device, a storage display area for displaying the start storage of the special view 1 and the special view 2 is allocated, and preread display and the like are performed together with the start storage display.

At this time, in the sub display device 480, an auxiliary effect (display of an auxiliary effect image, a notice image, etc.) of the content displayed on the main display device 35 is performed. In addition, it displays the number of pending displays, or executes a common drawing variation display game.

[Screen Display (Sub Display Device)]
Next, the details of the sub display device 480 will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the configuration of the sub display device 480 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in which (A) is a display screen of the sub display device 480, (B) is a common game assistance display area, C) shows a state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the special view variable display game.

As shown in (A), in the screen of the sub display device 480, a regular drawing game auxiliary display area 482 is disposed in the upper right portion, and a special drawing game auxiliary display area 483 is disposed in the lower portion. The regular drawing game auxiliary display area 482 and the special drawing game auxiliary display area 483 are invariable display areas in which the display position is fixed. Note that the immutable display area may be hidden during the customer waiting demo, or the display may be continued as it is.

As shown in (B), the common drawing game supplementary display area 482 displays the number of pending display of the common drawing fluctuation display game on the right side and the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game on the left side. Although the pending display number of the common drawing variation display game is displayed as a numerical value, it may be displayed in other manners.
Although the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is represented by a hit “o” or an out “x”, it may be other aspects. While the common drawing variation display game is being executed, "o" and "x" are variably displayed.

In addition, the special figure game auxiliary display area 483 includes a special game state display area 484a, a special memory number display area 485a, a special game state display area 484b and a special memory number display area 485.
b is included.

In the special 1 game state display area 484a, the state display symbol (in the special figure 1 variation display game (
The fourth symbol is displayed. Further, the number of pending display for executing the special view 1 variation display game is displayed in the special storage number display area 485a. Similarly, the special game state display area 484b
, A state display symbol (fourth symbol) in the special view 2 variation display game is displayed. In the special storage number display area 485b, the number of pending display for executing the special view 2 variation display game is displayed.

Since the number of pending displays displayed in the special storage number display area 485a and the special storage number display area 485b is displayed as a number, the prefetch display is not performed.

The state display pattern (fourth pattern) displayed in the special game state display area 484a and the special game state display area 484b changes and stops at least in parallel with the decorative pattern, thereby advancing the decorative symbol change display game. It is a symbol that can be grasped, and in the present embodiment, it is also a symbol for deriving the result of the decorative symbol variation display game in combination with the decorative symbol (left, middle, right). For example, it is possible to distinguish a small hit and a 2 round big hit that have similar appearances at the time of hitting with the combination of the same decorative symbols by the fourth symbol.

As shown in (C), in the variable display of the state display symbol (fourth symbol), the displayed color is variable. Specifically, "white" → "blue" → "green" → "yellow" → "orange" → "red" → "white" · · ·
・ Display changes in the order of ・.

In addition, regardless of whether the upper rendering device 400 is operating or not, since the sub display device 480 is not shielded by another movable role or the like, the common drawing game auxiliary display area 482 and the special drawing game auxiliary display An area 483 (the fourth symbol display area 484 and the number-of-memory display area 485 of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2) is always visible.

[Waiting for customers]
Next, details of the customer waiting process (step B1310) in the above-described 1st scene control process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the procedure of customer waiting processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether a customer waiting demo is being executed (step B1401). If the customer waiting demo is not running (the result of step B1401 is “
N ′ ′), it is determined whether a customer waiting start flag is set (step B1402).
When the customer waiting start flag is not set (result of step B1402 is "N"),
A customer waiting start timer is set (step B1403), and a customer waiting start flag is set (step B1404).

The main control microcomputer 710 ends the setting of the customer waiting start flag (step B1404) or the customer waiting start flag is already set (step B140).
If the result of 2 is "Y") and the customer waiting start timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B140)
5). Then, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting start timer is 0 (step B1406).

When the start timer has become 0 (the result of step B 1406 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes a customer waiting demo setting process to start the customer waiting demonstration (step B 1407). Furthermore, each waiting demo start flag is reset (step B1408),
A setting cancellation timer for canceling the customer waiting demo is set (step B1409). When the customer waiting demo setting process is executed, a selection screen of the shooting notification mode is displayed automatically or by the operation of the player.

If the setting cancellation timer has ended, or if the waiting for customer demonstration has already been started (the result at step B1401 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines that the cancellation timer is not 0 − 1 is updated (step B1410). Then, it is determined whether the release timer is 0 (step B1411).

When the setting cancellation timer is 0 (the result of step B 1411 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 resets the notification mode setting completion flag (step B 1412) and resets the setting of the emission notification mode (step S 1412) B1413). In addition, when the setting of the emission notification mode is reset, the setting is made to notify the respective timings of the fixed side and the variable side.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to select a shooting notification mode for assisting in selecting whether the number of big hit rounds is fixed or changed (lottery) during execution of the customer waiting demo. . As described above, after a big hit occurs, the game ball is fired toward the sorting device 90, and the fluctuation side (
The determination method of the number of big hit rounds can be selected by passing the first pass gate unit 34g) or the fixed side (second pass gate unit 34h). In the present embodiment, it is possible to set a launch notification mode for reporting the opening timing of the gate during the waiting for customer demonstration, and a method for setting the launch notification mode will be described below.

When the selection screen of the emission notification mode is displayed on the main display device 35, the main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether or not the emission notification mode is being selected (step B1414). If the emission notification mode is not selected (the result of step B 1414 is “N”), it is determined whether or not there is an emission notification switching operation (step B 1415). If there is no launch notification switching operation (the result at step B 1415 is “Y”), the customer waiting process is ended.

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is a selection operation of emission notification (step B1416). When there is a selection of launch notification (the result of step B 1416 is “Y”
And the emission notification mode corresponding to the selection operation is highlighted (step B1417).

When there is no selection operation (the result of step B1416 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710
Or, when the highlighting of the emission notification mode corresponding to the selection operation is ended, it is further determined whether or not there is an operation for determining the selected emission notification mode (step B1418). Furthermore, when the decision operation of the emission notification mode has not been made (the result of step B1418 is "N"), the customer waiting process is ended.

When there is an operation for determining the emission notification mode, the main control microcomputer 710 (step B14).
The result of step 18 is "Y", and the emission notification mode corresponding to the confirmation operation is set (step B141)
9). Further, the notification mode setting completion flag is saved (step B1420), and the confirmation screen is displayed for a predetermined time (step B1421). Thereafter, the customer waiting process is ended. The selection of the emission notification mode is performed by setting the emission notification mode (FIG. 97) and setting screen (FIG. 103).
This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG.

[Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the during-variation process (step B1311) in the 1st scene control process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the during-variation process of the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the effect request flag is set (step B1501). When the effect request flag is set (the result of step B1501 is "Y"), various information is set.

Specifically, the main control microcomputer 710 first clears PB (push button) information (step B1502). The PB (push button) information is input information by the effect button 17.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the movable body request (step B15).
03). That is, the operation mode of the movable illumination and the electric combination is set according to the contents of the effect.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a variation effect pattern setting process (step B1504). In the change effect pattern setting process, the stop symbol of the special view change display game is set, and the change time and the advance notice effect are set based on the change pattern command.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a feature presentation operation setting process (step B1).
505). The feature rendering operation setting processing is processing for setting a rendering device that performs rendering in response to the fluctuation pattern, and the content (rendering mode) of the rendering operation by the rendering device. Back side effect operation control process described later (step B1513) based on the effect mode set in the feature effect operation setting process
), Lower part production operation control processing (step B1514), upper part production operation control processing (step B
1515), right portion effect operation control processing (step B1516) is executed.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes random number seed initialization processing (step B15).
06). The random number seed initialization process is a process of initializing a random number seed used to determine the contents of the effect.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a scene sequence table corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern (step B1507). Thereafter, a fluctuation time setting process for setting the fluctuation time is executed (step B1508). Then, the first scene is set, and a scene update timer is set (step B1509). Finally, the effect request flag is cleared (step B1510), and the process during variation is ended.

On the other hand, when the effect request flag is not set (the result at step B1501 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether the scene update timer has become 0 (step B1511). If the scene update timer has become 0 (the result of step B1511 is "Y"), that is, if it is the scene switching timing, the next scene data set in the scene sequence table is set (step B1512).

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 operates various movable roles (rendering devices) corresponding to the scene. Specifically, back side rendering operation control processing (step B1513), lower rendering operation control processing (step B1514), upper rendering operation control processing (step B1515), and right portion rendering operation control processing (step B1516) are executed. .

Here, the presentation aspect regarding various movable roles will be described. Specific contents of the back side rendering operation will be further described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87, and an upper rendering operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. Further, the details of the right-side effect operation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.
The right-side effect operation will be further described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94.

[Backside production device]
FIG. 85 is a view of the back side effect device 300 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the upper right, (A) shows the state before the slide operation of the shutter unit 330, (B) shows the state of the shutter unit 330. It shows the state during the slide operation. FIG. 86 is a front view of the operation of the back side effect device 300 according to the first embodiment of this invention, in which (A) shows the state before the pivoting door 340 pivots, (B) shows the pivoting. The state after the movable door 340 is rotated is shown.

Referring to FIG. 85A, when the center case 34 is seen from above, the upper surface wall 222b of the cover member 222 is decorated with characters. In addition, the movable decorative member 223 is disposed between the upper surface wall 222 b so as to overlap with the center lower portion of the main display device 35 from the front. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the shutter units 330 disposed on the left and right slide toward the center of the main display unit 35 from the accommodation space.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86A, the left and right shutter units 330 move to predetermined positions. When the left and right shutter units 330 move to a predetermined position, the pivoting door 34
0 is in a rotatable state. The pivoting door 340 can be pivoted independently of the operation of the shutter unit 330.

A gap is provided between the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330 in order to prevent damage due to contact or the like. In this case, the player can not visually recognize this gap from the player in the game regardless of whether the effect by the movable decorative member 223 is being executed. The effects by the movable decorative member 223 (the lower effect device 220) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, until the pivoting door 340 provided in the left and right shutter units 330 is pivoted, a sectioned area is formed by the left and right shutter units 330, and it becomes possible to visually recognize the display by the main display device 35. There is. At this time, as shown in FIG. 86A, the identification symbol displayed on the main display unit 35 is reduced and displayed so as to be visually recognizable by the player, and a reach effect image is displayed. There is also an area outside the left and right shutter units 330 in which the display by the main display device 35 can be visually recognized, and an effect image (external effect image) is also displayed in this area.

Thereafter, the left and right pivoting doors 340 pivot to shield the central portion of the main display device 35. A decoration is given on the back surface side of the pivoting door 340 such that the left and right pivoting doors 340 approach each other to form one design (design). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), "match"
The character decoration of is derived. At this time, the magnetic bodies 344 are accommodated on the facing sides of the left and right pivoting doors 340, and the left and right pivoting doors 340 are configured to maintain a combined state in which they approach due to the magnetic force.

Moreover, one side is a hard-magnetic body, and the other is a soft-magnetic body with respect to the magnetic body with which the rotation door 340 is equipped and to mutually adsorb | suck. For example, the right pivoting door 340 has a hard magnetic body at the upper side and a soft magnetic body at the lower side, and the left pivot door 340 has a soft magnetic body at the upper side and a hard magnetic body at the lower side. Thus, as compared with the case where the hard magnetic body is disposed on one pivoting door 340 and the soft magnetic body is disposed on the other pivoting door 340, the positional deviation occurs when the left and right pivoting doors 340 are in the combined state. It becomes difficult to occur. Note that both of the magnets accommodated in the left and right pivoting doors 340 may be made of a hard magnetic material.

[Lower production device]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the lower effect device 220 according to the first embodiment of this invention, (A
Is a view from above of the movable decorative member 223 before operation, and (B) is a movable decorative member 223.
Shows a view from the front of the state after the operation of.

Referring to (A), as described above, the movable decorative member 223 is a shutter unit 3 on the left and right.
The gap between the lower protrusions 330b of 30 is arranged to be covered from the front so that the player can not visually recognize the gap. Thereby, the left and right shutter units 330 actually combine (abut)
Although it is not carried out, it can be seen as if it were united (contacting), and it becomes possible to enhance the rendering effect while preventing damage to the lower projecting portion 330b of the left and right shutter units 330. . The movable decorative member 223 may be moved when the shutter unit 330 slides, or may be operated independently. In addition, with respect to the upper side projecting portions 330a of the left and right shutter units 330, as in the lower side projecting portions 330b, it may be difficult to visually recognize the gap by a decorative member such as the movable decorative member 223.

As shown in (B), when the movable decorative member 223 moves upward, the entire decorative body 224 becomes visible to the player. Even in this case, as described above, the movable decorative member 223
However, the gap between the lower protrusions 330b of the left and right shutter units 330 can not be viewed from the player. In addition, about the member which shields the clearance gap between the upper side protrusion part 330a or lower side protrusion part 330b in an eye-visible manner, it is good also as a decorative member which does not move.

[Upper production device]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main display device 35 and the sub display device 480 from the start of the variable display game to the temporary stop in the first embodiment of the present invention.

When the variable display game is started and the reliability to be a big hit (special result aspect) is high (
As shown in A), the preview effect image is displayed on the sub display device 480. The degree of reliability is higher when the preview effect image is displayed than when it is not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in (B), the auxiliary effect image is displayed on the sub display device 480, and the reach occurs. The auxiliary effect image may correspond to the advance effect, or may be an independent image according to the reliability or the like.

Then, as shown in (C), when the identification symbol is temporarily stopped, the operation display image is displayed on the sub display device 480. When the operation prognostic image is displayed, the rendering is performed in a mode that suggests the start (development) of the operation of the sub display device 480 such as the upper rendering device 400 vibrating up and down. (C) There is a case where the identification symbol is actually stopped from the state of the temporary stop shown in (C), but when it is developed, the temporary stop of the symbol is continued and the effect shown in FIG. 89 is executed.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a development effect performed by the upper effect device 400 after temporary stop of the variable display game according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

Referring to (A), the start of the development effect is displayed in the variable display area 481 of the sub display device 480, and the upper effect device 400 performs the lowering operation. After that, as shown in (B), the upper rendering device 400 operates to vibrate up and down, and the rendering according to the reliability of the big hit (special result mode) is executed.

Referring to (C), a message indicating that the degree of reliability to be a big hit (special result mode) is medium (“I will go!”) Is displayed, and then the upward operation of the upper rendering device is executed. . And as shown to (D), the presentation which shows that the reliability used as a big hit (special result aspect) is moderate is performed.

Referring to (E), the variable display area 481 is in the transmission state, and the light guide plate 4 located at the rear is
By performing the light-emitting production by 70, a message (“big chance !!!”) indicating that the degree of reliability to be a big hit (special result aspect) is large is displayed. Then, the upward operation of the upper effect device is executed, and as shown in (F), an effect indicating that the reliability to be a big hit (special result mode) is large is executed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to effectively capture the sense of expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Right part production device]
Next, the details of the right-side effect operation control process (step B1516) in the above-described in-variation process will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the procedure of right-side effect operation control processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether or not it is set to execute the right-side effect operation in the object effect operation setting process (step B1505) (step B7001).
If the right-side effect operation is not set to be performed (the result of step B7001 is “N”), the right-side effect operation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 is set to execute the right-side effect operation (the result at step B7001 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is the effect start timing (step B7002) ). When it is not the effect start timing (the result of step B7002 is "N"), the processing after step B7006 is executed.

When it is the effect start timing (step B7002), the main control microcomputer 710
Result of “Y”), the moving operation of the movable decoration unit 550 is set (step B700)
3). Further, the hand effect image is displayed on the main display 35 (step B7004).
). As shown in FIG. 91, the hand effect image is an image for explaining an effect using an infrared sensor (hereinafter, described as a "human sensor") provided in the movable decoration unit 550. Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 sets the maximum rotation speed of the rotary cylinder 580 according to the reliability of the big hit (step B7005).

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is a period in which the human sensor 590 is enabled (human sense detection period) (step B7006). If it is in the human sense detection period (the result of step B7006 is "Y"), the effect image is updated (step B7007).
In the updated hand-effect image, for example, as shown in FIG. 92, a more specific operation explanation is given, and as shown in FIG. 93, the remaining time is displayed.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether a human feeling has been detected (step B7008). If human feeling is detected (the result of step B 7008 is “Y”), the rotational speed of the rotary cylinder 580 is increased if the rotary cylinder 580 has not reached the maximum rotational speed (step B 7009).

The main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not it is the effect end timing (step B
7010). When it is not the effect end timing (the result of step B7010 is "N")
, And right part production operation control processing ends.

On the other hand, in the case of the effect end timing (step B701)
If the result of 0 is "Y", the rotation of the rotating barrel 580 is stopped and the return operation of the movable decoration unit 550 is set (step B7011), and the effect result image is displayed on the main display 35 as shown in FIG. (Step B7012).

FIG. 91 to FIG. 94 are diagrams for explaining the aspect of the right-side effect operation according to the first embodiment of this invention. The rendering by the right-side rendering device 500 (“hand holding chance” rendering) is performed when the reach occurs. The identification symbol is displayed on the main display 35 when the "hands up chance" effect is being executed.
Is displayed fluctuatingly in the upper right part of the.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the “hand holding opportunity” effect is started, first, the contents of the “hand holding opportunity” effect and the description of the operation are displayed. At this time, the right part effect device 500 moves toward the center of the game board.

Further, in the “hand holding chance” effect, the player shakes his hand in front of the rotating cylinder 580 provided in the right part presentation device 500, and the rotating cylinder 5 is detected by the human detection sensor 590.
80 can be rotated. In addition, the rotating barrel 580 rotates at high speed according to the speed and the number of times of shaking the hand.

As shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, when the right part effect device 500 moves to the center of the game board and reaches a predetermined position, the explanation display section appears after the right part effect device 500 moves. Further, a display indicating the position where the hand is held (the detection range of the human sensor 590) is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 93, the remaining time of the “hand holding chance” effect is displayed on the main display device 35. The remaining time may be displayed on the sub display device 480.

When the “hand-up opportunity” effect is time-up, information (“super heat!”) Indicating the degree of reliability is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the development effect is executed. By performing such an effect, the player actively participates in the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Process during the big hit round decision]
Next, the process of determining the big hit round in the 1st scene control process described above (step B)
The details of 1313) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing during big hit round determination according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether a round determination start command has been received (step B 7101). If the round determination start command has not been received (the result of step B 7101 is “N”), the processes after step B 7106 are executed.

On the other hand, when the round determination start command is received (the result at step B 7101 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the lowering operation of the sub display device 480 (step B 7102). Further, the sub-display device 480 displays a shooting stop suggestion image (step B7103). As shown in FIG. 101 (B), the sub display 480 is lowered to cause the sub display 480 to display an emission stop suggestion image including a message suggesting that the emission be temporarily stopped. Further, the main display device 35 displays a message to the effect that game explanation is to be made. Thereafter, the game explanation is continued on the main display device 35 (FIG. 102).

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 outputs a voice stop suggestion sound (step B7104)
), “1” is set to the process number in the big hit round determination process (step B7105)
).

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the distribution state command has been received (
Step B7106). If the distribution state command has been received (the result of step B 7106 is “Y”), distribution state notification corresponding to the received distribution state command is executed (step B 7107). The distribution state notification is, for example, a lens member 61 corresponding to the received distribution state,
63 is lit.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a process according to the process number (step B71).
08). If the process number is "1", a round determination method explanation process is executed to explain the game for determining the big hit round (step B7109). Details of the round determination method explanation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing number is “2”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a firing notification mode setting process to notify the firing timing for determining whether to make the big hit round variable or fixed (step B7110). . Details of the emission notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing number is “3”, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a firing timing notification process for reporting a firing timing corresponding to the determination method of the big hit round set by the player (step B7111). Details of the emission timing notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not a round number determination command has been received (step B7112). When the round number determination command has not been received (the result of step B7112 is “N”), the process during the big hit round determination is ended.

On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 receives a round number determination command notifying that the number of rounds has been determined (the result at step B7112 is “Y”), the gate passing sound corresponding to the round number determination command is output. It outputs (step B7113). As shown in FIG. 99, the gate passing sound corresponding to the round number determination command is, for example, “Zukuen!” For 15 rounds, “Push!” For 5 rounds, and “Chaken!” For 10 rounds. Different notification sounds are set as shown in FIG.

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 causes the main display device 35 to display a round determined image corresponding to the determined round (step B7114). Further, a round determined image corresponding to the determined round is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B7115). Thereafter, in order to restore the lowered sub display 480, the rising operation is set (step B7116).
And the distribution state notification is stopped (step B7117). After that, the process during the big hit round decision is ended.

[Round determination method explanation processing]
Next, the details of the round determination method explanation process (step B7109) in the above-described big hit round determination process will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a procedure of round determination method explanation processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether the update timer has been set (step B7201). The update timer is a timer for managing the time for outputting the round determination method to the main display device 35. When the update timer has already been set (the result at step B7201 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 executes the processing after step B7207.

When the update timer has not been set yet (step B72)
It is determined whether the result of 01 is "N" and the first hit in the non-power-supply state (whether the explanation display condition is satisfied) (step B7202). In the case of the first hit in the non-power support state (step B 72
If the result of 02 is "Y", that is, the first big hit from the game start in the non-power support state, the main display 35 displays a detailed explanatory image of the round determination method (step B72)
03). Then, the detailed explanation update timer is set (step B7204).

On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 is not the first hit in the non-power-supply state (step B7)
If the result of 202 is "N"), that is, a big hit has already occurred since the start of the game,
Since the detailed explanation image of the round determination method is already displayed, a simplified explanation image of the round determination method is displayed on the main display 35 (step B7205). Then, the simplified explanation update timer is set (step B7206).

If the update timer has already been set (the result at step B7201 is “Y”), step B7
If the process of step 206 or step B7206 is completed, the main control microcomputer 7 continues.
If the update timer is not 0, 10 is updated by 1 (step B7207). Furthermore, it is determined whether the update timer has become 0 (step B7208).

When the update timer has not become 0 (step B72), the main control microcomputer 710
The result of step 08 is “N”), and the image is updated to the explanation image according to the timer value of the update timer (step B)
7209). On the other hand, if the update timer becomes 0 (the result at step B7208 is “Y
And the process number is set to "2" (step B7210). After that, the round determination method explanation processing ends.

Launch mode setting process
Next, the emission mode setting process in the above-described big hit round determination process (step B71)
The details of 10) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the procedure of the emission mode setting process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main control microcomputer 710 first determines whether there is a notification mode set completion flag (see FIG.
Step B7301). The notification mode setting completion flag is set when the player has determined whether the determination method of the big hit round is variable or fixed. If there is a notification mode setting completion flag (the result at step B 7301 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines that the process number is “3”.
(Step B7311), and the emission mode setting process ends.

If there is no notification mode set completion flag (step B73), the main control microcomputer 710
It is determined whether the result of 01 is “N”) and the setting screen has been displayed (step B 730)
2). Then, if it has not been displayed (the result of step B7302 is “Y”), a launch notification mode setting screen is displayed (step B7303).

Further, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is a selection operation of the emission notification mode on the emission notification mode setting screen (step B7304). If there is a selection operation of the emission notification mode (the result of step B7304 is "Y"), the emission notification mode corresponding to the selection operation is highlighted (step B7305).

Subsequently, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not there is a decision operation of the selected emission notification mode (step B7306). If the selected operation for determining the emission notification mode has not been performed (the result of step B 7306 is “N”), the emission mode setting process is ended.

On the other hand, when there is a decision operation of the selected launch notification mode (the result of step B7306 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the launch notification mode corresponding to the decision operation (step B7307), The notification mode setting completion flag is saved (step B7308). Further, the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the main display unit 35 (step B7309), and the guidance display screen is displayed on the sub display unit 480 (step B7310). After that, the processing number is "3"
(Step B7311), and the emission mode setting process ends.

[Fire timing notification process]
Next, the details of the emission timing notification process (step B7111) in the above-described big hit round determination process will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a procedure of round determination method explanation processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main control microcomputer 710 first checks the setting of the emission notification mode (step B7).
401). Then, it is determined whether the set emission notification mode is a default (both (variation, fixed) notification) setting (step B7402). If the set emission notification mode is the default setting (the result at step B 7402 is “Y”), a state notification image corresponding to the distribution state command is displayed (step B 7407). As shown in FIG. 100, when the sorting state command indicates the fluctuation side, a message such as “If the fluctuation gate is now!” Is displayed as the status notification image 1, and the sorting state command indicates the fixation side. In this case, a message such as “Now if fixed gate!” Is displayed as the status notification image 2.

On the other hand, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the emission notification mode (steps B7403 and B7404). If the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the emission notification mode (the result of step B7404 is “
Y "), and displays a shooting suggestion image on the sub display device 480 (step B7405). If the received distribution state command does not correspond to the setting of the emission notification mode (the result of step B7404 is "N"), the emission standby suggestion image is displayed on the sub display device 480 (step B740)
6). In addition, as shown in FIG. 100, when the received distribution state command corresponds to the setting of the release notification mode, a message such as “Datatachi !!” is displayed as the emission suggestion image, and the received distribution is received. When the minute state command does not correspond to the setting of the emission notification mode, a message such as “Wait still!” Is displayed as the emission standby suggestion image.

[Release notification mode]
Here, the selection of the emission notification mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 106. FIG. 101 and FIG. 102 explain the flow from the result of the (decorative) special view variation display game of the first embodiment of the present invention to the second special result to the presentation of the method for determining the big hit round. It is a figure to do. FIGS. 103 and 104 are diagrams for explaining the procedure for selecting the emission notification mode for determining the big hit round according to the first embodiment of this invention. FIGS. 105 and 106 are diagrams for explaining the flow from the display of the image showing the emission notification timing according to the first embodiment of the present invention to the passage of the gaming ball through the passage gate.

FIG. 101 (A) shows a state in which a second special result big hit (probable change, normal) in which a lottery for a big hit round is made as a result of the variable display game. At this time, since the number of big hit rounds has not been determined, the special game state has not been started. Further, the distributing member (switching portion 93) of the distributing device 90 is switched to the fluctuation side and the fixed side at predetermined time intervals. As described above, the LED is lit (flickers) via the lens members 61 and 63 in response to the switching of the distributing member (switching unit 93). The switching of the distributing member (switching unit 93) of the distributing device 90 is continuously switched to the fluctuation side and the fixed side at predetermined time intervals other than when the big hit round is determined.

Thereafter, as shown in (B), the upper rendering device 400 is lowered, and the sub display 480
A message is displayed in the variable display area 481 of to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball.
At this time, the main display device 35 displays a message to the effect that game explanation will be made from now on. In the sub display device 480, as described later, a notification to urge the game ball to stop being released is performed, so the player can be surely noticed by moving the upper effect device 400 (lowering operation).

Further, as described above, the sub display device 480 is disposed in the vicinity of the distribution device 90 and in front of the main display device 35 so as not to overlap with the game explanation displayed on the main display device 35. By moving it, it is possible to effectively suppress the launch of the gaming ball toward the sorting device 90.

FIG. 102 shows a state in which the description of the game for determining the big hit round is displayed on the main display device 35. At this time, the sub display device 480 continues to display a message to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the number of big hit rounds is determined by passing the gaming balls to the pass gate. Referring to FIG. 103, it is in a state for selecting one of the notification modes of "fixed", "lottery" and "both". The selection of the notification mode is selected by operating the selection button 29, and is determined by operating the effect button 17. For example, FIG. 104 (A)
As shown in the drawing, by selecting “lottery” with the selection button 29 and operating the effect button 17, as shown in (B), the emission notification mode is determined.

To further explain the number of rounds of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 41 (B) (C), “
"Fixed" is fixed for 10 rounds, and "lottery" is selected by drawing either 5 rounds or 15 rounds. In this regard, by clearly showing on the main display device 35, it becomes possible to make the player understand the determination mode of the gaming value for each gate (specific area), and the big hit round number determination game (auxiliary game) progresses smoothly. It is possible to achieve

In this manner, since the player can be set to select and notify the distribution state, any one of the “fixed (first specific area)” and the “lottery (second specific area)” can be specified. It becomes easy to carry out the launch operation of the game ball which aimed at the field.

To explain the case where "lottery" is selected, as shown in FIG. 105A, when the switching unit 93 is closing the variable side, the sub display device 480 waits for a message ("Wait still "!!" is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in (B), when the switching unit 93 opens the variable side, a message (“Datatachi !!”) instructing the sub display device 480 to fire is displayed .

Thus, at the timing when the player selects the determination method of the number of big hit rounds,
Since the launch timing of the game ball is notified, it is possible to prevent the launch of the game ball at a time different from the set launch timing.

Then, the game ball is fired in accordance with the notification, and as shown in FIG. 106A, a lottery for the number of big hit rounds is performed by causing the game ball to pass through the gate designated by the player.
In (A), since the game ball passes through the first pass gate unit 34g on the variable side, a lottery of the number of big hit rounds of 5 rounds or 15 rounds is performed. In (B), the number of rounds is 15
Since the round is won, a message indicating that (“15R determined !!”) is displayed on the main display device 35, and a message of blessing is displayed on the sub display device 480.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of jackpot rounds (type of special gaming state) is determined against the player's intention while making the player understand the contents of the auxiliary game for selecting the jackpot determination method. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the problem.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main display device 35 displays an explanation about the auxiliary gaming state, and the sub display device 480 performs notification to urge the game ball to stop firing, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the information. Can be presented.

[Right strike warning]
Next, details of the right-turn warning command reception process (step B1322) in the above-described 1st scene control process will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure of right-turn warning command reception processing according to the first embodiment of this invention.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the right-handed warning is being displayed (step B 7501). If the right-handed warning is displayed (the result at step B 7501 is “Y”),
The process after step B7507 is executed.

Further, when the main control microcomputer 710 is not displaying the right-handed warning (step B75)
It is determined whether the result of 01 is “N”) or the right-handed warning command has been received (step B7)
502). If the right-handed warning command has not been received (the result of step B 7502 is “N”), the right-handed warning command reception process is ended.

On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 receives the right-handed warning command (the result at step B 7502 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the advance presentation effect is being executed by the sub display device 480 (step B 7503). If the advance notice effect is being executed on the sub display device 480 (the result of step B 7503 is “Y”), the process of receiving the right-turn warning command is ended in order to prioritize the display of the notice effect.

It should be noted that a warning image of a right-handed strike may be displayed even while the preview effect is being executed. In this case, a reduced display is performed so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the preview image being displayed.

On the other hand, when the preview effect is not being executed on the sub display device 480 (the result of step B 7503 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the lowering operation of the sub display device 480 (step B 7504). At this time, when the variable display game is being executed on the main display device 35, a right hit warning image described later may be displayed at the initial position without lowering the sub display device 480.

Also, the main control microcomputer 710 displays a right-handed warning image on the sub display device 480 (see FIG.
Step B7505). The right-hand warning image may be a left aiming suggestion image. Further, the main control microcomputer 710 sets a warning display timer (step B7506).

Subsequently, if the display timer is not 0, the main control microcomputer 710 updates −1 (step B7507). Then, it is determined whether the display timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step B7508). If the display timer has not timed out (step B
The result of 7508 is "N", and the right-handed warning command reception process is ended.

On the other hand, when the display timer has timed out (the result at step B 7508 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 sets the up operation to return the sub display device 480 to the initial position (step B 7509) . Further, the right-handed warning image (left aiming suggestion image) of the sub display device is erased (step B7510), and the right-handed warning command reception process is ended.

FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining an example of a right-handed warning according to the first embodiment of this invention (A
The first pass gate unit 34g or the second pass gate unit 34 by performing a right strike during the normal game).
The figure shows that the game ball passes through h, and (B) shows that a right-handed warning is issued.

In the game in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the left hit is performed except when the big hit round is determined. As shown in (A), when the game ball passes the first passing gate unit 34g or the second passing gate unit 34h by performing a right strike during the normal game, the game control device 60
A right-turn warning command is transmitted from 0 to the effect control device 700.

When the presentation control device 700 receives a right-handed warning command, as shown in (B), the sub-display 480 is lowered and a right-handed warning image (“I fired to the left side in the variable display area 481 of the sub-display 480 Please display "). At this time, when the variable display game is being executed on the main display device 35, as described above, the sub display device 480 is not lowered.
A right-handed warning image may be displayed at the initial position.

[Error monitoring]
Next, a gaming machine error monitoring process in the 1st main process described above (step B1010)
The details of) will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine error monitoring process according to the first embodiment of this invention.

The main control microcomputer 710 first executes the RAM initialization notification process (step B20).
01). RAM initialization notification processing, such as at the time of startup, game control device 600 and effect control device 7
This processing is to notify that the RAM of 00 has been initialized.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a frame open sensor error notification process (step B2002). In the frame open sensor error notification process, while the glass frame 6 and the front frame 5 are open, specifically, from the reception of the open command of the frame to the reception of the close command,
Report an error. In the error notification, a notification sound is output or the gaming state notification LED 12 is turned on. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112, an error occurs in the main display unit 35, and an error type in the sub display unit 480. (Error code) and further, the speaker 10
It is designed to give notice by sound from.

Thus, the main display device (first display device) 35 and the sub display device (second display device)
By displaying an error at 480, it is possible to improve the deterrent effect of an act that may be fraudulent.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a payout error notification process (step B200).
3). In the payout error notification process, an error generated in the payout control is reported based on the command transmitted from the payout control device 640.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes a magnetic sensor error notification process (step B).
2004). In the magnetic sensor error notification process, an error is notified based on the command transmitted from the game control device 600 based on the abnormality detected by the magnetic sensor 23.

As shown in FIG. 111, the magnetic sensor 23 is disposed upstream of the gate through which the game ball passes (e.g., the drawing start gate 36) and the winning opening (e.g., the starting winning opening 37, 38, the general winning opening 40). Be done. This is to detect an injustice such as changing the track of the gaming ball by a magnetic force of a magnet or the like and winning.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 executes radio wave sensor error notification processing (step B).
2005). In the radio wave sensor error notification process, an error is notified based on the command transmitted from the game control device 600 based on the abnormality detected by the radio wave sensor 24.

Finally, the main control microcomputer 710 executes human-sense-sensor error notification processing (step B2005). In the human sensor error notification process, the effect control device 700 is a human sensor 590.
An error is independently reported based on the abnormality detected by

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the human sensor 590 is arranged to cover an area (human sensor detection range) 992 which can not be covered by the magnetic sensor 23. As described above, by setting the region 992 not in the detection range 991 of the magnetic sensor 23 as the detection range by the human sensor 590, the number of magnetic sensors 23 can be reduced.

The magnetic sensor 23 may be accommodated in the dummy accommodating portion 275. Thereby, the detection range of the magnetic sensor 23 can be expanded. Further, although the magnetic sensor 23 is provided on the decoration member at the back of the game board, it may be provided on the front or back of the game board 32.

In the present embodiment, the human sensor 590 is used for rendering when the right part rendering device 500 is movable, but when the right part rendering device 500 is not movable, the human sensor 590 functions as an abnormality detection sensor. And as above-mentioned, when the human sensor 590 is in the detection state more than predetermined time, it is controlled to notify abnormality (error). The details of the human sensor error notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

As described above, the detection range by the human sensor 590 is the general winning opening 4 disposed in the lower right portion.
It covers the upstream part of 0. In this manner, by setting the detection range upstream of the winning opening, it is possible to effectively detect an abnormal action that may be illegal.

[Human sensor error processing]
Next, human-sense-sensor error processing in the aforementioned gaming machine error monitoring processing (step B20)
The details of 06) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a procedure of human sensor error processing according to the first embodiment of this invention. In human sensor error processing, human sensor 5
While the effect using 90 is not being performed, the human sensor 590 gives notification as an error when detecting the human feeling for a predetermined period.

First, the main control microcomputer 710 checks whether or not the variable display game (rendering operation fluctuation displaying game) in which the rendering operation is performed by the right side rendering device 500 is being executed (step B 760).
1). Then, it is determined whether or not the rendering operation change display game is being executed (step B7)
602). When the rendering operation change display game is being executed (the result of step B7602 is “
Y "), the process after step B7609 is performed.

When the rendering operation change display game is not being executed (the result of step B7602 is “N”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the human feeling detection state is present (step B76).
03). If the human touch detection state is in effect (the result of step B7603 is "Y"), the error determination counter is updated by +1 (step B7604).

Then, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether the value of the error determination counter has reached the error determination value (step B7605). If the value of the error determination counter has reached the error determination value (the result of step B7605 is “Y”), error notification is executed (step B7606). In addition, since the error detection by the human sensor is that a part of the player's body is located at a position unrelated to the game, an error notification may be made in a short time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds). ), Or may be released as soon as the non-humanity detection state is reached.

On the other hand, when the main control microcomputer 710 is not in the human-sense detection state (step B7603)
It is determined whether or not the non-human feeling detection state continues for a predetermined time (step B7607). If the non-personal-sense detection state continues (the result at step B 7607 is “Y”), the error determination counter is reset (step B 7608).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the human-sense detection state is detected a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, it is determined that an error has occurred, and a notification sound is output. That is, in the normal state, the non-human
To determine the occurrence of an abnormal situation (in other words, an act having a possibility of fraud) in which the human sensor 590 in the non-detection state is in the human-sense detection state (detection state) over a predetermined period It becomes possible.

Next, the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether an error notification is in progress (step B).
7609). If the error notification is not in progress (the result at step B 7609 is “N”), the human sensor error processing ends.

On the other hand, when error notification is in progress (the result at step B 7609 is “Y”), the main control microcomputer 710 determines whether or not the cancellation condition of the error notification is satisfied (step B 7610).
). The cancellation condition of the error notification is, for example, when there is a cancellation input from an employee or a player of the game arcade, the non-human feeling detection state continues for a predetermined time. Further, the release input may be provided with a dedicated switch, or may be a special operation such as long press of the effect button 17 (for example, 3 seconds).

When the cancellation condition of the error notification is satisfied (step B7)
The result of 610 is "Y", and the error notification is canceled (step B7611). On the other hand, when the cancellation condition of the error notification is not satisfied (the result of step B 7610 is “N”), the error notification is continued, and then the human sensor error processing is ended.

According to the present embodiment, the detection by the human sensor (non-contact sensor, infrared sensor) 590 is used not only to perform a predetermined effect (right effect) but also to determine the occurrence of an abnormality. Thus, the human sensor 590 can be effectively utilized other than at the time of performing rendering.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the gaming machine has been described in which the non-contact sensor capable of detecting a part of the player's body can be effectively utilized other than the effect. On the other hand, in the second embodiment,
As to the gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the game by the prefetching effect with high game characteristics, FIG.
This will be described using FIGS. Note that the probability fluctuation state and the time shortening fluctuation state are referred to as a specific gaming state.

As the pre-reading effect in the prior art, for example, when a winning to be pre-read occurs, the effect control device 700 (starting memory display means, more specifically, the main control microcomputer 710, PROM 702,
The display color of the start memory (pending memory) displayed on the variable display device 35 by the image control microcomputer 720, PROM 703, VDP 730, image ROM 704, and each program has reliability (expected degree, ease of making a big hit) An effect aspect is known which is displayed in a color according to the user. On the other hand, in the pre-reading effect of the present embodiment, when a winning to be pre-reading occurs, the normal start memory display (a state where the pre-reading effect is not performed or a state with the lowest reliability, a normal start memory display mode The starting memory is displayed in the same form as in. Subsequently, advance notice display indicating whether or not the start memory display changes to a mode (special start memory display mode) notifying reliability as a part of the pre-reading effect (for example, an artillery animation in which a shell is shot in the start memory display) Is executed to make the player predict whether the start memory display changes to the special start memory display mode. Thereafter, change / non-change is executed to the special start memory display mode of the start memory display at the final stage of the advance notice display. Here, there are a case where the change / not change as predicted by the player and a case where the change / not change is different from the prediction. When the start memory display changes to the special start memory display mode, the reliability of the start memory is informed according to the changed mode. Thus, it is a feature of the present embodiment that the advance notice display is executed as a part of the pre-reading effect.

FIG. 113 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect in the case where the start storage display does not move and the shell hits in the second embodiment of the present invention.

In (a), the variable display game is being executed, and there is a prize to be read ahead already, and the first display portion 771 has a first start memory (hereinafter referred to as “remember 1”. Second and subsequent ones) It is a screen which shows the state where the same was said about the description of pending storage. Here, even the start-up storage to be read ahead is displayed without change as a normal start-up storage display (normal start-up storage display mode).

(B) is a screen showing a state in which, for example, a cannon appears as a prior notice display, and a cannonball is fired toward the hold 1 display unit 771. The broken arrow indicates the trajectory and is not actually displayed.

(C) is a screen showing a state in which a message "JUST HIT?" Is displayed and the player is notified that the shell may hit storage 1; Since the player can predict the falling position of the shell from the ballistics in (b) to (c), it is possible to predict whether or not the shell will hit the starting memory (storage 1), and in the present embodiment, Guess that the player will hit. (D
Is a screen showing a state in which a shell is close to landing on the display 1 771. Here, the player is convinced that the shell will hit the starting memory (storage 1).

In (e), as expected by the player, the cannonball hits storage 1 and the display of "HIT !!" is displayed, and the display form of the start memory is a highly reliable star form from a normal form (special start memory Display mode) is displayed on the screen. By changing to the star-shaped display (form), the player is informed that the reliability of the start memory (storage 1) has been promoted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the cannon appears and the cannonball is fired toward the starting memory display by or after the prize for the effect of the pre-reading effect, it is predicted whether to hit or not, and the prediction is Belief, it gives the player a sense of expectation until the hit and whether or not the reliability of the starting memory is promoted if the player hits the hit, and the preread effect with high playability is executed. In addition, since advance notice display is performed before the promotion notification, it is less likely to miss the promotion notification.

Although FIG. 113 describes the case where the shell is hit, as shown in FIG. 115, there may be a case where advance notice display of an aspect in which the form of the start memory display does not change without hitting the shell. Note that displaying a series of animations (prior notice display) during reach production makes the display unit 35 a bothersome and makes it difficult to understand either of the effects, and therefore advance notice display is not performed during reach production. Further, the cannon may be expressed by a motorized role provided outside the display unit 70 without displaying on the display unit 35a. In that case, since the effects can be displayed large, interest is improved. Further, in the present embodiment, the advance notice display is performed for the start memory of the normal start memory display mode, and the special start memory display mode is changed to the special start memory display mode. A special start memory display mode with high reliability may be provided, a preliminary notice may be displayed for the start memory of the special start memory display mode with low reliability, and the special start memory display mode with high reliability may be changed.

FIG. 114 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the prefetching effect in the case where there is a prize to be prefetched in G3 in the second embodiment of the present invention.

In (a), the variable display game is being executed, and there are winnings that are not already targeted for prefetching in the first and second tiers, and there are winnings to be read ahead in the third tier. The first and second indicators 771, 772, 772 FIG. 18 is a screen showing a state in which start storage retention 1, retention protection 2, and retention 3 are displayed on the retention display unit 773; FIG.

(B) is a screen which shows the state in which the shell was fired toward the starting memory display, and (c) is
“JUST HIT?” Is displayed, and it is a screen showing a state in which the player is notified that the shell may hit Save 3. The trajectory is different as compared with the case of being fired toward the display 1 display unit 771 of FIG. 113, and the player can display the display 1 77 from the trajectory in (b) to (c).
It is speculated that the shell will fall to a location closer to the cannon than 1, that is, it will hit Save 3.

Subsequently, the player in contact with the screen of (d) just before landing is convinced that the shell will hit the storage 3. (E) is a screen showing a state where the shell has hit the start memory display of the storage 3 as expected by the player. By the hit, the display of "HIT !!" is displayed, the display of the start memory of storage 3 is changed to a star shape, and the promotion of the reliability is notified.

FIG. 115 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the prefetching effect (previous notice display) in the case where the display of the start memory does not change (the so-called notice) since the shell did not hit in the second embodiment of the present invention It is.

(A) is a screen showing a state in which the variable display game is being executed as in FIG. 113, there is a prize to be read ahead already, and the start storage is displayed on the storage 1 display unit 771.

(B) is a screen which shows the state in which the shell was fired toward the starting memory display, and (c) is
Is displayed, and it is a screen showing a state in which the player is notified that the shell can not hit the start memory display (storage 1). The player infers that the shell in (b) to (c) will fall to a location closer to the cannon than the storage unit 771, ie, it will not hit the starting memory display (storage 1).

Subsequently, the player in contact with the screen of (d) just before landing is convinced that the shell will not hit the starting memory (storage 1). (E) is a screen showing a state where the shell has not hit the starting memory (storage 1) as expected by the player. Since the shell has come off, the display of "Fail !!" is displayed, and the display of the starting memory does not change.

As described above, the pre-reading effect of the present embodiment is not necessarily hit (reliability is promoted) even if the advance notice display is performed, so that the game property can be enhanced.

FIG. 116 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect when the starting memory display is moved and the shell is hit in the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen showing a state where the variable display game is being executed as in FIG. 115, there is a prize to be read ahead already, and the start storage is displayed on the storage 1 display unit 771.

(B) is a screen which shows the state in which the shell was fired toward the starting memory display, and (c) is
Is displayed, and it is a screen showing a state in which the player is notified that the shell can not hit the start memory display (storage 1). The player may see that the cannonball falls from the trajectory in (b) to (c) to a position closer to the cannon side than the storage 1 display 771, that is, the start memory display (
I guess that I will not hit him. Up to this point is the same as FIG.

Unlike (d) in FIG. 115, the display of “MISS?” Disappears, and this is a screen showing a state in which the start memory (reserve 1) displayed on the reserve display portion 771 moves to the expected landing point. is there. The player has speculated that the shell in (b) to (c) will fall to a location closer to the cannon than the storage unit 771, ie it will not hit the starting memory display (storage 1) Since the starting memory display (G1) has moved to come into contact with the cannonball, it is possible to betray the expectations so far, to give the player unexpectedness and to have an expectation that the cannonball will hit. it can.

(E) is a screen which shows the state where the shell was hit to the starting memory display which has moved. According to the hit of the shell, the indication of "CRUSH" is displayed, the indication of the starting memory is changed to a star shape, and the promotion of the reliability is informed.

(F) is a screen showing a state in which the promoted start storage display moves to the display 1 771. When the starting memory display returns to the original position (the first display unit 771), the display of the further winnings can be displayed as before.

As described above, the pre-reading effect when the starting memory display comes into contact with the shell is executed at a constant rate or randomly. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and to improve the playability by novel effects such as never before. That is, the advance notice display performs the same display for a predetermined period after the display is started depending on whether or not the start storage display changes to the special start storage display mode. Therefore, since it is prevented that it will be understood for a while after the advance notice display is started whether or not the starting memory display changes, the sense of expectation continues for a long time, and the interest is improved. It should be noted that if a new winning is generated while the starting memory display moves back to the original position, the new starting winning display starts after the moved starting memory display returns to the original position. Memory is displayed. That is, when there is a new start winning combination during the pre-reading effect, the display of the starting memory according to the new starting winning combination will be delayed until the pre-reading effect ends.

FIG. 117 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect when the starting memory display is moved and the shell is not hit in the second embodiment of the present invention. Contrary to the mode shown in FIG. 116, this is a pre-reading effect when the start memory display escapes from the bullet.

(A) is a screen showing a state in which the variable display game is being executed as in FIG. 113, there is a prize to be read ahead already, and the start storage is displayed on the storage 1 display unit 771.

(B) is a screen which shows the state in which the shell was fired toward the starting memory display, and (c) is
It is a screen showing a state in which a message "JUST HIT?" Is displayed and the player is notified that the shell may hit the storage 1. The player can predict that the ballistics in (b) to (c) will cause the shell to hit the storage 1. Up to here, it is the same as FIG. 113 in which the munitions hit storage 1.

In (d), the display of "JUST HIT?" Disappears, and the state of the start memory display (G1) displayed in G1 display unit 771 moves to the cannon side so as to be away from the expected landing point. It is a screen which shows. The player had inferred that a shell would fall from the trajectory in (b) to (c) to the storage 1 display unit 771, that is, it would hit the starting memory display (storage 1), and the starting memory display could Because it moved to flee from, giving the player a surprise. (E) "
Fail! ! Is displayed, the cannonball is dismounted, and since the cannonball is dismounted, the display of the starting memory does not change.

(F) is a screen which shows the state which a starting memory display moves to the maintenance 1 display part 771. FIG. By returning the starting memory display to the original position, the display of the further winnings can be displayed as before.

As described above, even if the ballistics are likely to be hit, the pre-reading effect when the starting memory display escapes from the shell is performed at a constant rate (or randomly). As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and to improve the playability by novel effects such as never before. Also,
The player can be given a feeling as if he or she had the intention to move to the start memory display.
Moreover, the advance notice display performs the same display for a predetermined period after the display is started depending on whether the start storage display changes to the special start storage display mode or not. Therefore, since it is prevented that it will be understood for a while after the advance notice display is started whether or not the starting memory display changes, the sense of expectation continues for a long time, and the interest is improved.

〔Time chart〕
FIG. 118 is a time chart explaining the display of starting storage in the case where a new winning is generated at the time of execution of the pre-reading effect in the second embodiment of the present invention.

First, there is one starting memory that is running a variable display game and is not already pre-read target (
At time t1 at which the number of pending displays is not being executed, a pre-read target prize occurs at time t1 and the start memory is displayed on the retention display 772 simultaneously with the winning, and the number of pending displays becomes two.

Next, at time t2 at which an arbitrary time has elapsed from the start of the currently running variable display game, the advance notice display is performed (the gunshot animation is activated).

Next, a new winning is generated at time t3 during which the advance notice display is being executed. Since the advance notice display is being executed, the new start memory is not displayed at time t3, and the number of pending display remains at 2.

Next, at time t4 at which the advance notice display has ended, the start storage of the new winning combination is displayed on the hold 3 display unit 773, and the number of pending displays is three.

As described above, while the advance notice display is being executed, the new start memory is not displayed even if a new winning is generated, and the start memory corresponding to the new win is displayed after the end of the advance notice display. For this reason, the start storage display to be read ahead can be moved in the display area of the new start storage. Also, the display area of the starting memory is used without being disturbed by the starting memory display due to new winnings, such as animation (gasse bombardment) when the shell is not hit even if the shell falls in the display area of the new starting memory Advance notice display is feasible.

FIG. 119 is a screen transition diagram explaining an aspect in which display of a plurality of start memories is changed by one bombardment animation in the second embodiment of the present invention.

In (a), the variable display game is being executed, and there is a prize to be read ahead already, and the first display section 771, the second display section 772, the third display section 773 have a start memory holding 1, a second holding and a third holding Is a screen showing a displayed state.

(B) is a screen which shows the state in which the shell was fired toward the starting memory display, and (c) is
The message “JUST HIT?” Will be displayed, and the shell may hit the starting memory display.
It is a screen which shows the state alert | reported to a player. The player will hit the center of the main display section 773 from the main display section 771 which is the display area of the three start memories displayed from the trajectories in (b) to (c). Infer.

In the screen of (d) just before landing, the player who touches the screen is convinced that the shell will hit the starting memory display. (E) is a screen showing a state where a shell is hit from the storage 1 display unit 771 to the storage 2 which is the central part of the storage 3 display unit 773 as expected by the player. According to the hit, "T
riple Hit! ! Is displayed, and the display of all start memories as well as storage 2 changes at one time, and the promotion of the reliability of each start memory is notified.

In this way, since the display of a plurality of start memories is changed (preread notice) for one pre-reading effect and the advance notice is displayed for that purpose, the player has an expectation that the plurality of start memories are promoted at once. You can look at it and give it a sense of Note that Figure 119.
Like in the case of giving advance notice of a plurality of starting memory displays, for example, it may be another type of shell, such as changing the color of the shell, or one cannon may fire the shell continuously. ,
You may make multiple cannons appear.

[Effect of Second Embodiment]
As described above, according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the advance notice display is performed before the pre-notification notification as a part of the pre-reading effect, so whether the reliability of the starting memory is promoted or not Since the player is given a sense of expectation and there is less chance to miss promotion, a highly play-ahead play effect is executed. In addition, since the player can predict that the reliability of the starting memory is promoted by the advance notice display, he can see with a sense of expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start memory display may move as one aspect of the advance notice display, which may result in a result contrary to the player's prediction, giving the player unexpectedness and The game effect can be enhanced by a novel effect not present before. In addition, even if a new winning is generated, the new start memory is not displayed until the start memory display moves back to the original position, so that the execution of the advance notice display is hindered. I can not.

Also, as another aspect of the pre-reading effect, the display of a plurality of start memories changes at one time, and in order to perform advance notice display for that purpose, the player has an expectation that the plurality of start memories are promoted at once. You can look at it and give it a sense of

(Modification 1 of the second embodiment)
In the first modification of the second embodiment, the execution of the winning animation and the digestion animation described below is added, and the advance notice display in which the winning animation and the digestion animation are combined with the shelling animation is executed.

In the winning animation, the start memory displayed by winning is first displayed outside the area of the special storage display area 77, and thereafter, according to the number of pending display, the first display 771 to the fourth display 774
It is an animation of the aspect which moves to either of. Further, the digest animation is an animation of a mode in which, when the starting memory is digested by the start of the variable display game, the display position of the subsequent starting memory display is moved up by one.

FIG. 120 is a screen transition diagram for explaining a winning animation in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the number of pending display is "0" while the variable display game is being performed. (B) is a screen showing a state in which a winning has occurred and the starting memory (storage 1) is displayed outside the special storage display area 77. For example, it is displayed at the same height in the horizontal direction as the special storage display area 77.

(C) is a screen showing a state where the starting memory display displayed in (b) has started moving toward the storage 1 display unit 771. The moving speed of the starting memory display is a speed recognizable by the human eye,
It does not move instantaneously. (D) is a screen which shows the state which the display of starting memory moved to the maintenance 1 display part 771, and it stopped.

Thus, in the present modification, when a winning occurs, the starting memory display is first displayed at the initial position, and thereafter, a winning animation in which the starting memory display is moved to a predetermined position is executed.

FIG. 121 is a screen transition diagram for explaining digestion animation in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the variable display game is being performed and three starting memory | storages are displayed. (B) is a screen which shows the state after the result of the variable display game is decided.

As for (c), with the execution of the new variable display game, one start memory (G1) is digested, and two G1 and G2 start memory displays are filled so that the G1 display unit 77 is a screen showing a state in which movement is started to the display unit 772. (D) is a screen which shows the state where the display of the moved starting memory stopped. Also in the subsequent movement of the starting memory display accompanying the consumption of the starting memory, the moving speed is a speed recognizable by the human eye and does not move instantaneously.

Thus, in the present variation, when the starting memory is digested, a digest animation is performed to move the subsequent starting memory display to be packed.

FIG. 122 is a screen transition diagram for describing a case where advance advance notice display is performed in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the number of pending display is "0" while the variable display game is being performed. (B) is a screen showing a state where a winning is generated and the start memory display (H01) is displayed outside the special memory display area 77 to start moving and a cannon appears and a shell is fired .

(C) is a screen showing a state in which the player is notified that "JUST HIT?" Is displayed and the shell may hit the starting memory display moving toward the storage 1 display 771. The player can predict from the movement speed and direction of the trajectory and the start memory display in (b) to (c) that the shell can hit the start memory display if it is kept as it is.

(D) is a screen just before landing, and the player is convinced that the shell will hit storage 1, and (e) shows that the shell has hit the starting memory display as expected by the player. It is a screen which shows.
By the hit, the display of "HIT !!" is displayed, the display of the start memory changes into a star shape, and the promotion of the reliability is notified.

As described above, in this modification, although the start memory display at the time of winning becomes the special start memory display mode and the start memory display notifies the reliability, the start memory display is the special start memory display mode from the beginning. Since advance notice display in which the shelling animation and the winning animation are simultaneously performed is performed instead of the display, it is possible to perform the pre-reading effect with higher game characteristics. Above all,
Generally, it is more difficult to hit the moving target than it is to hit the stationary target, so if you hit the moving target, the player's sense of accomplishment is enhanced, and the fun of the game is enhanced. It can be enhanced. In addition, since the start memory display is promoted after the normal start memory display is performed, it can be recognized that even the game player who plays the game for the first time is that the start memory display is previewed and notified.

FIG. 123 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the execution of pre-reading effect other than at the time of winning in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

In (a), the variable display game is being executed, and there are winnings that are not already targeted for prefetching in the first and second tiers, and there are winnings to be read ahead in the third tier. FIG. 18 is a screen showing a state in which start storage retention 1, retention protection 2, and retention 3 are displayed on the retention display unit 773; FIG. (B) is a screen showing a state in which a cannon appears and a shell is fired toward the display 377. (C)
“JUST HIT?” Is displayed, and it is a screen showing a state in which the player is notified that the shell may hit Save 3. The player infers that the ballistics in (b)-(c) will hit the store 3.

(D) is a screen just before landing, and the player is convinced that the shell will hit Save 3. (E) is a screen showing a state where the shell has hit the start memory display of the storage 3 as expected by the player. By the hit, the display of "HIT !!" is displayed, the display of the start memory of storage 3 is changed to a star shape, and the promotion of the reliability is notified.

As described above, in the present modification, since the pre-reading effect is executed suddenly even at timings other than winning, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

FIG. 124 is a time chart illustrating control in which animation 1 is executed during the variable display game in the first variation of the second embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. Here, for convenience, for example, from the start to the end of the advance notice display described in FIG.
A pattern to be executed within the execution time of the variable display game of times is referred to as animation 1.

First, during the execution of the variable display game, the operation of animation 1 is started (t1).
Specifically, the cannon appears and fires the cannon toward the starting memory display of the storage 3 to be read ahead.

Next, when the display of the starting memory display, which is the target of prefetching, changes to a star shape and the reliability is promoted and displayed, the advance notice display ends and animation 1 ends (t2). Note that FIG. 123 illustrates from time t1 to time t2.

Next, when the result of the variable display game in progress is determined after the end of animation 1 and a new variable display game is started, a digest animation is started to start moving so as to close the subsequent start memory display of FIG. To do (t3).

Next, the movement of the start memory display is ended (digestion animation is ended), and the number of pending display is "
2 ”(t4).

The time between the time t2 when the animation 1 ends and the time t3 when the new variable display game starts may be very short, or the times t2 and t3 may be simultaneous. That is, the animation 1 is performed so that the execution start (digestion animation) of a new variable display game is not performed during the execution of the animation 1.

FIG. 125 is a screen transition diagram for explaining, among the prefetching effects other than at the time of winning, the prefetching effect at the timing when the starting memory is digested in the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the variable display game is being performed and three starting memory | storages are displayed. (B) is a screen showing a state where a cannon has appeared and a shell has been fired toward the display 377, and so far is the same as FIG. (C) is a screen showing a state in which the player is notified when the variable display game is finished and the result is determined, and "JUST HIT?" is there.

In (d), with the start of execution of a new variable display game, the display of "JUST HIT?" Disappears, and one starting memory (one storage) is digested, and two subsequent starting storage displays (two storage, FIG. 18 is a screen showing a state in which movement is started to the first display unit 771 and the second display unit 772 so as to pack the second 3). The cannonballs are about to drop into the display 377. The player (b)-(c)
That the cannonball falls from the ballistics in the main 3 to the display 3 773, that is, the starting memory display (the third storage)
While guessing that it would have hit the player, the start memory display moved to escape from the shell, giving the player some surprise.

(E) is a screen showing “ Miss !!” is displayed because the start memory display has moved away so that the shell dropped onto the storage 3 display unit 773 has not hit the start memory display. The display of the starting memory does not change because the shell is detached.

As described above, in this modification, even if the advance notice is displayed before the winning, the manner in which the shell is detached is also executed by executing the advance notice at the timing at which the starting memory is digested. Therefore, since the target starting memory display moves by the fall of the shell and escapes from the shell, it becomes comical pre-reading effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the same way as there is a so-called notice on advance notice, there is also a notice on the advance notice display (in this case, the fire strike).
Can improve the gameplay. Further, with regard to the movement of the start memory display, prediction can be made in relation to the progress of the variable display game, and the interest is enhanced. In addition, since it is deviated by the movement of the starting memory display according to the start of the variable display game, it is felt unintentionally and the player's willingness to play is not attenuated.

FIG. 126 is a time chart illustrating control of animation 2 at a timing when a new variable display game is executed according to the first variation of the second embodiment of the present invention shown in FIG. Here, for convenience, for example, a pattern executed from the start to the end of the advance notice display across the execution time of a new variable display game, as described in FIG. Note that, in the animation 2, the digestion animation is performed during the bombardment animation following the start of the bombardment animation.

First, during the execution of the variable display game, the operation of animation 2 starts (t1).
Specifically, the cannon appears, and the cannon is fired toward the start memory display of the storage 377 to be read ahead.

Next, the result of the variable display game being executed is determined, and the variable display game is stopped (t2).
The animation 2 at time t2 is a situation where the shell is flying toward the display 377.

Next, a new variation display game is started, and a digest animation that moves to close the subsequent start memory display is started (t3). Animation 2 at time t3 is a situation in which the shell is falling toward the display 377.

Next, as the start memory display moves so as to escape, the shell dropped to the storage 3 display unit 773 is detached, and the animation 2 is stopped. At the same time, the digest animation ends and the number of pending displays becomes "2" (t4). In FIG. 125, time t1 to time t4 are illustrated.

As described above, animation 1 is executed without overlapping the execution time of the two variable display games, but animation 2 is executed in the form of straddling the execution times of the two variable display games. Since the game control device 600 determines the execution time of the variable display game at the time of executing the variable display game and transmits it to the effect control device 700, the effect control device 700 displays the advance notice according to the end timing of the variable display game. Control is possible. Therefore, in this modification, when the start memory display is changed (promoted) and the advance notice is performed, animation 1 is executed so that the execution time of the two variable display games does not extend, and the start memory display is not changed. If no advance notice is given, the animation 2 is executed by straddling the execution times of the two variable display games. Therefore, due to a slight difference in the start timing of the artillery animation which is advance notice display, or a slight difference in the execution time, animation 1 which is not executed overlapping with the digest animation which is the effect at the start of the variable display game , And the player changes the hold display to the special start memory display mode or the hold display to the special start memory display mode until the end of the shelling animation. Since it is not known whether it is the animation 2 which is not, it can be enjoyed with the expectation of promotion of the memory display (start notice display) until the end with the promotion of the memory display.

[Effect of Modification 1 of Second Embodiment of the Present Invention]
As described above, according to the first modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, when the starting memory is digested, the subsequent starting memory display is moved so as to be packed. Therefore, by executing prior advance notice display in accordance with the movement timing of the start memory display, it is possible to move the start memory display with necessity, and it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect with enhanced game characteristics. Since movement of the start memory display in an unnatural manner can be avoided, the player's willingness to play is not impaired.

Further, in the present modification, the generated start memory is first displayed at the initial position, and thereafter, a winning animation that moves to a predetermined position is executed. Therefore, by performing advance notice display combined with artillery animation in accordance with the movement timing of the starting memory display,
It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect with enhanced gameplay.

In addition, in this modification, when the starting memory is digested, a digest animation is executed to move the display of the subsequent starting memory to be packed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the advance presentation effect with enhanced gameplayability by executing the advance notice display in accordance with the movement timing of the firing memory display.

(Modification 2 of the second embodiment)
In the second modification of the second embodiment, when winning in the start winning entry during reach, a case where the display of the start memory is kept hidden and a case where it is displayed are provided, and a specific event occurs. In this case, a winning animation for notifying the start winning even during the reach is executed.

FIG. 127 is a screen transition diagram explaining the non-display mode of the start storage display at the time of reach effect in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in execution of a variable display game. All decorative patterns are changing, and there are three start memories of 1st to 3rd, and the 1st display portion 771 of the special 1 display area 77.
The start storages 1 to 3 are displayed on the display 377, respectively.

(B) is a screen which shows the state which the symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 stopped by "1". (C)
Is a screen showing a state in which the symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 is stopped at “1”, and the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the display symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 become the same in the reach mode.

(D) is a screen showing a state in which the reach effect is started, and the reach effect screen is gradually displayed larger from the lower side of the screen.

(E) is a screen which shows the state in reach production. For example, the fluctuation of the variable display game is displayed small on the upper right of the screen so that the start memory display is not displayed so that the reach effect is largely displayed on the screen and does not disturb the reach effect screen.

(F) displays the lost effect in the reach effect and ends the reach effect screen, and the inside decoration pattern 7
The symbol “63” is a symbol “2” of a symbol different from the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the right decorative symbol 762
Is displayed, and the result of the variable display game being executed is a screen showing a state determined as “off”. The non-display state of the start memory display is released, and the start memory display is redisplayed in the special storage display area 77.

Thus, in the reach effect screen, the start memory display is in the non-display state so as not to hinder the reach effect (start memory display non-display means). In addition, it does not need to display a reach production screen in all reach. For example, the reach effect screen may be displayed only when the SP reach is performed, and the reach effect screen may not be displayed when the normal reach is performed. In that case, the starting memory is continuously displayed even during normal reach.

FIG. 128 illustrates a winning animation in a normal starting memory display in the case where the lottery result of the winning starting memory is “off” or in the second example of the second embodiment of the present invention. Screen transition diagram.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the fluctuation display game is being performed although the number of pending display is "0". In the state (b), a winning is generated, and the start memory display of the normal form (normal start memory display mode) is displayed outside the special display area 77 (for example, the lower center of the screen) where the initial position is. Is a screen showing

(C) is a screen which shows the state which the starting memory display displayed by (b) is moving toward the maintenance 1 display part 771 which is a predetermined position. (D) is a display of the start memory is a display 1 771
It is a screen which shows the state which moved to and was stopped. As described above, by executing the winning-time animation when the starting memory is generated, it is possible to clearly notify that the starting memory is generated.

FIG. 129 illustrates a winning animation in the special start storage display mode in which the lottery result of the start storage obtained in the winning combination is “hit” or in the pre-reading notification in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. Screen transition diagram.

(A) is the same as FIG. 128, and is a screen showing a state where the number of pending displays is “0” but the variable display game is being executed. In (b), a prize is generated, and the start memory display of the special start memory display mode (for example, star shape) is displayed outside the special memory display area 77 (for example, the lower center of the screen) where the initial position is. Is a screen showing Unlike in the case of FIG. 128, the display of the start memory is produced as a special form (special start memory display mode) from the beginning to inform the player that the start memory is hit or highly reliable.

(C) is a screen which shows the state which the starting memory display of the special starting memory display mode displayed by (b) is moving toward the maintenance display part 771 which is a predetermined position. (D) is a screen which shows the state which the display of starting memory moved to the maintenance 1 display part 771, and it stopped. As described above, when the lottery result of the winning start memory is "hit" or when the pre-reading notification is given, by executing the winning animation in the special starting memory display mode when the starting memory is generated, It is possible to clearly notify that start-up memory has occurred and to notify that start-up memory is "hit" or high reliability.

FIG. 130 shows prizes in the special starting memory display mode in the case where the lottery result of the starting memory for which winning is achieved during the reach is “hit” or in the case of the advance notification in the modification 2 of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a screen transition diagram explaining animation.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in execution of a variable display game. All decorative symbols are changing, and there is a start memory of the first storage, and the first display portion 771 of the special storage display area 77 displays the start storage 1.

(B) is a screen which shows the state which the symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 stopped by "1". (C)
Is a screen showing a state in which the symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 is stopped at “1”, and the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the display symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 become the same in the reach mode.

(D) is a screen showing a state in which the reach effect is started, and the reach effect screen is gradually displayed larger from the lower side of the screen.

(E) is a screen which shows the state in reach production. For example, the fluctuation of the variable display game is displayed small on the upper right of the screen so that the start memory display is not displayed so that the reach effect is largely displayed on the screen and does not disturb the reach effect screen. Up to this point is the same as FIG. 127 except for the number of start memories.

(F) shows a state in which there is a winning combination in which the lottery result is "hit" or an advance notification and the start memory display of the special start memory display mode is displayed outside the special memory display area 77 where the initial position is. It is a screen. The non-displayed state of the winning animation is canceled by the occurrence of the winning (or high reliability) winning, and the winning animation is displayed as shown in FIG. 129 (start memory display non-display temporary suspension means). It should be noted that the display of the winning animation during reach production is a form in which the start memory display is not noticeable, for example, translucent and thin, so as not to hinder the reach production.
It is displayed as a display of lowered brightness, a display of lowered contrast, or the like.

(G) is a display section 772 in which the start memory display of the special start memory display mode is a predetermined position.
It is a screen which shows the state which is moving toward. (H) is a screen which shows the state which the starting memory display of the special starting memory display mode moved to the maintenance 2 display part 772, and stopped.

(I) is a screen showing a state in which the display of the starting memory has become non-displayed again because the winning animation has ended. The start memory display is hidden until the reach effect is finished so as not to hinder the reach effect.

(J) displays the lost effect in the reach effect and ends the reach effect screen, and the inside decoration pattern 7
The symbol “63” is a symbol “2” of a symbol different from the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the right decorative symbol 762
Is displayed, and the result of the variable display game being executed is a screen showing a state determined as “off”. The non-display state of the start memory display is released, and the start memory display is displayed in the special storage display area 77.

Thus, in the reach effect screen, the start memory display is in the non-display state so as not to hinder the reach effect. However, if there is a hit or a high-reliability winning, for example, a winning animation expressed as semi-transparent is executed, and even if it is in reach, the pre-read contents of the new start memory are notified. Therefore, even if the start memory display is in the non-display state (start memory display non-display means) during the predetermined effect such as reach effect, if there is a winning or “hit” or high reliability, the start memory display Since the non-display state is temporarily stopped and the prize animation is executed in the special start memory display mode (start memory display non-display temporary stop means), it is possible to notify that it is "hit" or high reliability It becomes. In addition, since the winning animation in that case is performed in a form in which the starting memory display is not noticeable, it is possible not to interfere with the reach effect and to notify that there has been a "hit" or highly reliable prize. It becomes.

FIG. 131 is a screen in the case where the reliability of the start storage winning during the reach is low and displayed as a normal start storage (normal start storage display mode) in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in execution of a variable display game. All decorative symbols are changing, and there is a start memory of the first storage, and the first display portion 771 of the special storage display area 77 displays the start storage 1.

(B) is a screen which shows the state which the symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 stopped by "1". (C)
Is a screen showing a state in which the symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 is stopped at “1”, and the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the display symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 become the same in the reach mode.

(D) is a screen showing a state in which the reach effect is started, and the reach effect screen is gradually displayed larger from the lower side of the screen.

(E) is a screen which shows the state in reach production. For example, the fluctuation of the variable display game is displayed small on the upper right of the screen so that the start memory display is not displayed so that the reach effect is largely displayed on the screen and does not disturb the reach effect screen. Up to here, it is the same as FIG.

(F) is a screen showing a state in which the non-display state of the start memory display is continued because the start winning combination has been made but the lottery result is "losing" or the normal start memory display. When the winning is "losing", since the necessity of pre-reading and previewing the lottery result during the reach effect is not high, the non-display state of the start memory display is not released. The same applies to the case of normal starting memory display.

(G) to (i) are screens showing a state where reach effect is in progress and the non-display state of the start memory display is continuing, and unlike in FIG. 130, no winning animation is displayed.

(J) displays the lost effect in the reach effect and ends the reach effect screen, and the inside decoration pattern 7
The symbol “63” is a symbol “2” of a symbol different from the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the right decorative symbol 762
Is displayed, and the result of the variable display game being executed is a screen showing a state determined as “off”. The non-display state of the start memory display is released, and the start memory display is displayed in the special storage display area 77.

As described above, when the lottery result of the winning starting memory is "hit" (or high reliability), the winning animation is executed even during the reach, and "off" (or normal starting memory display mode) Because there is no case in some cases, the effect of the reach effect is not lost in the start prize of "off", and the winning animation is performed without spoiling the reach effect in the start prize of "hit", so the effect of reach effect is reduced. It is possible to effectively provide the player with advance notification while minimizing the amount, and the gaming machine is enhanced in interest. Further, in the case of the special start memory display mode, it is possible to clearly notify that the special start memory display mode is the special start memory display mode because a prize animation which is not normally performed is performed during the reach. The winning animation may not be displayed, but may be internally performed. In that case, when the winning animation is not finished when the reach effect is finished, it becomes easy to perform the remaining winning animation after the reach effect. In addition, winning animation may be performed after the reach effect is finished.

FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining an aspect of a winning animation in the case where a high winning or high reliability winning occurs in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 132A is a diagram for describing a winning animation in the case where a winning result with a “winning” lottery result occurs at the time of normal fluctuation (non-reach mode). Since there is no start memory, and a "hit" winning has occurred, the start memory of the special start memory display mode is displayed at the initial position at the lower center of the screen, and then the display 1 is moved to the display 1 771. Since the variable display game being executed is a normal change, the winning animation is normally displayed, not as translucent.

FIG. 132 (B) is a diagram for explaining a winning animation in the case where a winning result with a lottery result of “hit” occurs in the reach mode. Since there is a guarantee 1 and a "winning" prize has been generated, a special form start winning indication is displayed at the initial position at the lower center of the screen, and then it is moved to the guarantee 1 display section 771. Since the reach effect is being executed, the start memory in the winning animation is displayed so as not to disturb the reach effect, such as semi-transparent. For example, the display color may be changed to a display color that does not inhibit reach effect.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the ratio of the special start storage display mode in the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

The ratio of the special start memory display mode when the "winning" winning occurs is 10% in the case of reach and 30% in the case of non-reach. In addition, the ratio to become the special start memory display mode (so-called Gase notice) when a "fall out" winning is generated is 5% when reaching, and 10% when not reaching.

As described above, in the case of reach, since the ratio of the special start memory display mode is set to be smaller than that in the case of non-reach, it is possible to suppress the loss of reach effect by the winning animation. In addition, when the winning result is a hit, the ratio of the special start memory display mode is set larger than in the case of the win, so when the winning animation of the special start memory display mode is executed during the reach, the reach is reached. Since the degree of reliability is higher than when the special start memory display mode winning animation is performed at other times, the player is more expected to execute the special start memory display mode winning animation during the reach. . Each ratio may be 0% or 100%.

[Effect of Modification 2 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, according to the second modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, when displaying the starting memory by winning, the winning animation displayed while moving the starting memory display is executed. Can be enhanced.

Further, in this modification, since it is possible to make the winning animation non-display mode during the reach effect, recognition of the player's reach effect by the winning animation being superimposed and displayed on the reach effect screen is performed. It is possible to avoid thinning.

Also, in the present modification, when a hit or a highly reliable winning occurs during reach production,
It is possible to carry out the movement display of the starting memory in an unobtrusive manner. Therefore, the annoyance that the winning animation is repeatedly displayed on the reach effect screen is reduced, and it is possible to inform the player of the hit (or that the reliability is high). In the present modification, the reach effect is used, but the effect may not be reach effect as long as the effect is performed in the start memory display area.

(Modification 3 of the second embodiment)
In the third modification of the second embodiment, when winning is achieved during the reach effect, the sound is used to notify the winning.

FIG. 134 is a screen transition diagram when a winning occurs during the reach in the modification 3 of the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in execution of a variable display game. All decorative symbols are changing, and there is a start memory of the first storage, and the first display portion 771 of the special storage display area 77 displays the start storage 1.

(B) is a screen which shows the state which the symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 stopped by "1". (C)
Is a screen showing a state in which the symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 is stopped at “1”, and the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the display symbol of the right decorative symbol 762 become the same in the reach mode.

(D) is a screen showing a state in which the reach effect is started, and the reach effect screen is gradually displayed larger from the lower side of the screen.

(E) is a screen which shows the state in reach production. For example, the fluctuation of the variable display game is displayed small on the upper right of the screen so that the start memory display is not displayed so that the reach effect is largely displayed on the screen and does not disturb the reach effect screen. Up to this point is the same as FIG. 130 except for the number of start memories.

(F) is a screen showing a state in which there is a winning combination in which the lottery result is "hit" or an advance notification and the non-display state of the start memory display is continuing. Further, at the time of winning, a sound (for example, an explosion sound) notifying the winning of the start storage of the special start storage display mode is output from the speaker 10.
When the winning animation is superimposed on the reach effect and displayed, the screen display becomes troublesome, so the non-display state of the start memory display is not released. As such, it is a feature of the present modification that the pre-reading effect for the winning in the reach is performed by the sound.

(G)-(i) is a screen which shows the state in which the reach production | presentation advances and the non-display state of a starting memory display is continuing.

(J) displays the lost effect in the reach effect and ends the reach effect screen, and the inside decoration pattern 7
The symbol “63” is a symbol “2” of a symbol different from the display symbol of the left decorative symbol 761 and the right decorative symbol 762
Is displayed, and the result of the variable display game being executed is a screen showing a state determined as “off”. The non-display state of the start memory display is released, and the start memory display is displayed in the special storage display area 77. The guard 2 that has won during the reach is displayed on the guard 2 display unit 772 in the special start storage display mode.

[Effect of Modified Example 3 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, according to the third modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, since pre-reading effect is performed by sound for winning in reach, pre-reading while reach effect is displayed as before. A notice can be made and informed.

Note that the prefetching effect of the present modified example may be executed for a winning at a timing that is not in reach. Further, the sound to be notified is not limited to the sound effect, and may be, for example, a sound notification of "I hit a hit!". Further, instead of the sound or together with the sound, the decorative member 7 may be set to a predetermined light emission mode. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine having a vibration function in the operation means such as the effect button 17, etc., the vibration function may be operated as a prefetch effect. That is, by performing pre-reading effect other than the reach effect screen, it is possible to perform pre-reading effect without impairing the reach effect performed on the screen.

Also, even when there is a winning (see FIG. 131) that is not a pre-notification notification, the sound effect is output,
The sound effect notifying that the winning of the hit has occurred may be a sound effect different from the winning which is not the advance notification.

In the present modification, the winning animation as shown in the second modification (FIG. 130) is not displayed during the reach, but the second modification may be used together in the second modification.

(Modification 4 of the second embodiment)
In the fourth modification of the second embodiment, every time the variable display game is executed, a prefetching effect is performed in which the reliability of the start storage display of the prefetch target is promoted.

FIG. 135 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the prefetching effect in the special view 1 in the modification 4 of the second embodiment of the present invention.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the variable display game is being performed and three start memories are displayed in the normal start memory display mode. (B) is a screen showing a state in which a pre-read target winning occurs and the start storage display of G4 is displayed as a pre-read mode in the special start storage display mode of the flower mark.

(C) is a screen which shows the state where the result of the variable display game which was under execution was decided. (
d) is a screen showing a state in which the start memory of G1 is digested and a new variable display game is executed. In accordance with the storage of the start memory of the storage 1, the displays of the subsequent start storage display storage 2 to storage 4 are moved so as to be packed into the storage 1 display unit 771 to the storage 3 display unit 773, respectively.

(E) is a screen showing a state in which the reliability has been promoted, and the reliability of the memory 3 which is the starting storage of the pre-read object has been promoted. While the starting memory moves, for example, an animation (promotion animation) in which stems grow from leaves and leaves grow from flower marks to change (promotion) to flower marks in Futaba, and the degree of reliability increases. (F) is a screen which shows the state where the result of the variable display game which was under execution was decided.

(G) is a screen which shows the state where the starting memory | storage of G2 was digested and the new fluctuation display game was performed. In accordance with the storage of the start memory of the storage 1, the display of the subsequent storage 2 and storage 3 of the start storage is moved to be packed into the display 1 771 and the storage 2 772, respectively.

(H) is a screen showing a state in which the reliability of the storage 2 which is the starting storage of the pre-read object is further promoted and the movement is completed. While the starting memory moves, for example, an animation is performed in which the stem further extends from the Futaba flower mark and leaves increase to change to a four leaf flower mark (promotion), and the reliability further increases.

Thus, it is a feature of the present modification that, every time the variable display game is executed, the reliability of the start storage display to be prefetched is gradually promoted (variation display game start updating means).
As described above, since the promotion effect is continuously performed over a plurality of variable display games, the special start memory having a higher degree of reliability is displayed from the special start memory display mode in which the starting memory display has low reliability every time the variable display game is started. Since the display mode is changed, the gaming machine is improved in the interest of promotion timing. Further, when changing the start memory display from the low reliability special start memory display mode to the high reliability special start memory display mode, the animation is performed to change the start memory display, so it is easy to understand that the display is promoted. In addition, it is difficult to know which color has high reliability in the special start memory display mode in the case of simply changing the color, but in this modification, the start memory display after promotion is a mode in which the start memory display before promotion has grown Because there is, it is easy to understand that it was promoted. Note that
The variable display game may be promoted, for example, every other variable display game without being promoted every time the variable display game is executed, and a plurality of variable display games until the variable display game corresponding to the target starting memory is executed may be promoted. Since it is possible to gradually change the display of the starting memory to be targeted when starting to a highly reliable special starting memory display mode, the enjoyment is improved by the varied promotion pattern.

FIG. 136 is a modification 4 of the second embodiment of the present invention provided with a plurality of start winning openings with the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the start storage of the special view 2 is not preferentially executed, that is, FIG. 8 is a screen transition diagram for explaining pre-reading effect in the case of sequentially digesting from the start storage winning first, regardless of the special view 1 and the special view 2.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the variable display game is being performed and six starting memory | storages are displayed. Here, the square starting memory display represents starting memory for winning of the special figure 1,
The triangular start-up memory display represents the start-up memory for winning of the special figure 2, and represents that it is a normal start-up memory display mode.

(B) is a screen showing a state where the special start storage display mode of the flower mark is displayed as the start storage in the special display 2 when a winning to be prefetched occurs in the special view 2;

(C) is a screen which shows the state where the result of the variable display game which was under execution was decided. (
d) is a screen which shows the state in which the starting memory (the storage 1 in (a)-(c)) which won a prize in special figure 1 is digested, and a new variable display game is performed. In accordance with the storage of the start memory of the storage 1, the displays of the subsequent start storage display storage 2 to storage 7 are moved so as to be respectively packed into the storage 1 display unit 771 to the storage 6 display unit 776.

(E) is a screen which shows the state which the movement of a starting memory display complete | finished. Since the starting memory digested in (d) is the starting memory winning a prize in Special Figure 1, the flower mark of the word mark 6 which is the starting memory indication of the prefetch target winning in Special Figure 2 does not change (promotion). The degree does not change. (F) is a screen which shows the state where the result of the variable display game which was under execution was decided.

As for (g), the starting memory (preserving 1 in (d) to (f)) that has won the special figure 2 is digested,
It is a screen which shows the state in which the new fluctuation display game was performed. In accordance with the storage of the start memory of the first storage, the display of the subsequent start storage display between the second storage and the second storage is respectively stored in the first display portion 771 to the second display portion 775
Move it to pack it.

(H) is a screen showing a state in which the movement is completed and the reliability of the start storage 5 to be prefetched is promoted. Since the starting memory digested in (g) is the starting memory winning in the special figure 2,
An animation in which a stem extends from a guard 5 flower mark, which is a starting memory display for a preread object that has won a prize in Special Figure 2, is animated to change the leaf to a flower mark of Futaba (promotion) and reliability increases.

As described above, when a prize to be read ahead is generated in the special view 1, whenever the start memory according to the special view 1 is digested, the promotion animation is performed in which the start memory display for the read ahead is promoted while performing digestion animation. When a prize to be read ahead is generated in the special figure 2, every time the starting memory according to the special figure 2 is digested, a promotion animation is performed in which the start memory display of the preliminary reading target is promoted while performing the digestion animation. It will be an entertaining game machine. In the modification (b), the start memory is displayed in the special start memory display mode of the flower mark since the start memory is generated, but the start memory is displayed in the normal start memory display mode when the start memory is generated. May be promoted from the normal start memory display mode to the special start memory display mode. In addition to promoting the latest startup memory, other startup memories may be promoted. For example, in (d) and (e), the starting memory according to the special figure 1 of the guard 5 or the guard 4 may be promoted. In addition, even if the start storage according to the special figure 2 occurs between (b) to (f), the start storage of the special start storage display mode according to the special view 2 of the storage 5 is promoted. Also, the variable display game may be promoted after being executed twice, for example, without being promoted every time the variable display game is executed, and a plurality of fluctuations until the variable display game corresponding to the target starting memory is executed Since it becomes possible to gradually change the display of the starting memory to be targeted to the highly reliable special starting memory display mode when starting the display game, the enjoyment is improved by the varied promotion pattern.

FIG. 137 is a modification 4 of the second embodiment of the present invention, provided with a plurality of start winning openings with the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the start storage of the special view 2 is preferentially executed. It is a screen transition diagram explaining pre-reading effect. The start memory of the special view 1 is displayed in the special storage display area 77, and the start memory of the special view 2 is displayed in the special storage display area 78. In the special storage display area 77, four display sections of a retention display section 771 to a retention display section 774 are provided in order from the left, and the special storage display area 78
Similarly, from the left, four display units, namely, a display 5 display unit 781 to a display 8 display unit 784, are provided.

(A) is a screen which shows the state as which the variable display game is being performed and four starting memory of special figure 1 are displayed. The start memory to be read ahead is displayed in the special start memory display mode of the flower mark on the storage display portion 774, and the start memory of the read ahead object is the start memory of the gaming ball winning in the special figure 1.

(B) is a screen showing a state in which a winning is generated in the special view 2 and the start storage is displayed on the storage 5 display unit 781.

(C) is a screen which shows the state where the result of the variable display game which was under execution was decided. (
d) is a screen showing a state in which a new variable display game has been executed as the starting memory winning in the special figure 2 is preferentially digested. Since it is a variable display game with start memory winning in the special figure 2, the flower mark of the security indicator 774 which is the start memory display for the pre-reading object winning in the special figure 1 is not promoted and the reliability does not change.

(E) is a screen showing a state in which the result of the variable display game being executed has been determined. (
f) is a screen showing a state in which a new variable display game has been executed after the storage of the starting memory which has won the special figure 1 is digested. In accordance with the storage of the start memory of storage 1, the subsequent displays of start storage display storage 2 to storage 4 are moved so as to pack the display 1 771 to the storage 3 773 respectively.

(G) is a screen which shows the state which the movement completed and the reliability of starting memory of pre-reading object was promoted. Since the start memory digested in (f) is a start memory winning a prize in Special Figure 1, an animation in which a stem grows and leaves from a flower mark of a guard 3 which is a start memory display of a prefetch target for winning in Special Figure 1. Change to the Futaba flower mark (promotion), and the reliability becomes high.

As described above, when special figure 2 is preferentially executed, the winning of the special figure 2 delays the start memory storage of the special figure 1 and therefore the promotion of the starting memory of the prefetch target for which the special figure 1 is prized is also delayed. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of carefully nurturing the starting memory of the prefetch target for which special figure 1 has won, and to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, it will be a production that is full of interest that the digestive animation and the promotion animation are linked. Further, since the execution of the start storage of the special view 2 has priority over the special view 1, the number of variable display games of the special view 2 to be executed until the start storage of the special view 1 to be a target of the prefetch notification is executed. In the variable animation game special animation of the special figure 2, by not promoting it, it is possible to avoid the absurdity of the number of digestion animations and the number of times of promotion.

[Effect of Modified Example 4 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, according to the fourth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, every time a new variable display game is executed, the starting memory display to be read ahead is promoted, so novelty which has never been seen before It is possible to provide the player with a good pre-reading effect.

In particular, every time the starting memory that has won the same starting winning opening as the starting memory to be read ahead is saved, the display of the starting memory to be read ahead is promoted, thereby giving the player a motivation to change how to hit. It can enhance interest. In addition, differentiation of the conditions for promotion makes it easy to understand and increase the interest of the game.

In this modification, it is explained that the starting memory display of the pre-reading object is promoted each time the starting memory is digested, but not only the promotion but also an effect of demotion (for example, reduction of stems and shrinking leaves) is performed. May be Further, in the present modification, the game is promoted for each variable display game, but it may not necessarily be promoted for each variable display game. For example, random numbers may be used to determine each variable display game, or the number and timing of promotion may be determined in advance from the number of start memories, etc., and promotion may be performed accordingly. In that case, for example, in FIG. 137, there is a maximum of 3 promotion opportunities, but the number of promotion is 2 and the promotion timing is the target for pre-reading.
The number of times of promotion and the timing of promotion may be determined in advance, such as deciding when the starting memory to be pre-read becomes a prize when the starting memory to be read ahead becomes a prize.

[Modification 5 of the second embodiment]
In the fifth modification of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine preferentially executing the special view 2, the reliability of the start storage display of the prefetch target is displayed each time the variable display game is executed regardless of the winning start winning opening that has won the prize. Perform pre-reading effects to be promoted.

FIG. 138 is a modification 5 of the second embodiment of the present invention, provided with a plurality of start winning openings with the special views 1 and 2 and the start storage of the special view 2 is preferentially executed. It is a screen transition diagram explaining pre-reading effect. Similar to FIG. 137, the start storage of the special view 1 is displayed in the special storage display area 77, and the start storage of the special view 2 is displayed in the special storage display area 78. Special storage display area 77
On the other hand, four display units are provided in order from the left: the first display unit 771 to the fourth display unit 774. Similarly, the second storage display area 78 is sequentially arranged from the left fifth display unit 781 to the eighth display unit 784. Are provided.

(A) is a screen which shows the state as which the variable display game is being performed and four starting memory of special figure 1 are displayed. The start memory to be read ahead is displayed in the special start memory display mode of the flower mark on the storage display portion 774, and the start memory of the read ahead object is the start memory of the gaming ball winning in the special figure 1. In the first to third states, the start-up memory is displayed in the normal start-up memory display mode.

(B) is a screen showing a state in which two special prizes are generated in the special view 2 and the start storage display is displayed on the storage 5 display unit 781 and the storage 6 display unit 782.

(C) is a screen which shows the state where the result of the variable display game which was under execution was decided. (
d) preferentially digest the starting memory card 5 winning the special figure 2, the new variation display game is executed, and the stem extends from the flower mark of the starting object memory card of the pre-reading object and leaves This is a screen showing a state in which the confectionery animation is performed and the Futaba flower mark is changed (promoted) and its reliability is increased.

In this modified example, the reliability of the start storage display of the prefetch target is promoted every time the start storage is digested for the start storage of the special view different from the start storage of the special view to be digested.

(E) is a screen showing a state in which the result of the variable display game being executed has been determined. (
f) is a screen showing a state in which a new variable display game has been executed by digesting the starting memory (5) which has won in the special figure 2; With the consumption of starting memory, it is the starting memory display of the pre-read target.
The stem is extended further from the Futaba flower mark, and the leaf increases animation to change to a four leaf flower mark (promotion), and the reliability further increases.

[Effect of Modified Example 5 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, according to the fifth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, every time the starting memory is digested for the starting memory of the special drawing different from the starting memory of the special drawing to be digested, prefetching The reliability of the subject's starting memory display is promoted. Therefore, when Special figure 2 is preferentially executed, when there are many winnings in Special figure 2, the starting memory display of the prefetch target of Special figure 1 is further promoted, so for example, the promotion level is reduced to promote the number of promotion times. In the end, it is possible to make a pre-reading effect that adds the enjoyment to be greatly promoted (for example, a big hit confirmation). In addition, when special figure 2 hits big in that state, 2 consecutive hits become decided, it becomes the game machine which heightens interest.

(Modification 6 of the second embodiment)
In the sixth modification of the second embodiment, the start storage display of the prefetch target is displayed until immediately before the result of the variable display game of the start storage is determined. In particular, it is a feature of the present modification that the preread display form of the starting memory during execution of the variable display game is displayed on the storage unit 79 (see FIG. 140).

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing a form of start-up memory display in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

The dotted square shown at the top of FIG. 139 represents that the start memory is not displayed,
There is no indication 791. For example, it indicates that there is no start memory display or that the start memory display has disappeared.

The three vertical lines shown second from the top are in a state in which five display modes from the normal display 793 to the double star 797 are fluctuating (in mini fluctuating 792) in the display section of the starting memory. In the present application, the variable display on the display portion of the starting memory is referred to as mini-variation. The mini fluctuation indicates that there is start memory, but there is an unconfirmed presence or absence of the pre-reading notification. The mini-variation may be a display form in which a variation display screen of the variation display game of the starting memory to be pre-read target is displayed in advance as part of the pre-reading effect.

Further, a solid-lined quadrilateral shown from the top to the top is a normal display 793 representing a display form (normal start memory display mode) of normal start memory in which no preview effect is given. The normal display 793 is not a read-ahead display form, or a display form representing the lowest reliability.

In addition, a double star 797 shown at the bottom from the five star 794 shown at the fourth from the top is a special start memory display mode in which a notice effect is given. The fifth star 794 shown from the top to the top is a display form representing low reliability, and the 6 star 795 shown from the top to the top is a display form representing medium reliability.

Also, a seven star 796 shown second from the bottom is a display form showing high reliability, and a double star 797 shown at the bottom is a display form showing maximum reliability or determination of a hit.

Thus, in FIG. 139, the display form of the start memory is shown such that the possibility of reaching or hitting (high reliability) increases toward the lower end.

FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining a display portion of start storage in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 140, the first display portion 771 to the fourth display portion 774 are provided in the first storage display area 77, and the second display portion 781 to the second display portion 781 are provided in the second storage display area 78. 784
Is provided.

In addition, in the middle of the special storage display area 77 and the special storage display area 78, a maintenance display part 79 is provided. The storage 0 display section is an area in which the display form of the starting memory at which the variable display game being executed is to occur is displayed.

FIG. 141 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the display mode 1 of the start-up memory display in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. In the display mode 1, the start memory display is temporarily displayed on the main display unit 771 in the mini change during the start winning at 792 and immediately stops moving to the main display display 79 while the mini changes and stops, as shown in FIG. This is an aspect displayed as any of the display forms from the star 794 to the double star 797. The stop mode in the storage 0 display section 79 reports the reliability of the variable display game being executed.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the number of pending display is "0" and the variable display game is stopped. (B) is a screen showing the timing when the special figure 1 is won and one start memory is generated. In the screen shown in (b), the generated start-up memory is immediately digested.
The start memory is displayed only for a moment as 792 during 1 mini change.

(C) is a screen showing a state in which the start storage display in the mini variation 792 is moved from the storage 1 display unit 771 to the storage 0 display unit 79 and the execution of the variation display game is started. (D) is a screen which shows the state (pre-derivation advance notice effect) displayed as the normal display 793 in which the starting memory display which was in the mini fluctuation 792 is stopped while the fluctuation display game is being executed. The mini-variation of the starting memory display is stopped and the display form displayed indicates the reliability (the degree of the possibility of becoming a big hit) of the variable display game being executed. In this case, since the stop mode is the normal display 793, low reliability is notified.

(E)-(g) are the screens which show the state where each decoration pattern stopped in order of the left decoration pattern 761, the right decoration pattern 762, and the middle decoration pattern 763. (H) is a screen which shows the state which the display of starting memory | storage of the storage 0 display part 79 extinguished simultaneously with completion | finish of a variable display game.

As described above, in the display mode 1, the start-up memory display during mini-fluctuation, in which the variable display game is to be generated shortly after the variable display game is executed, is stopped in the storage unit 0. Therefore, it has a pre-deduction advance presentation effect means in which the reliability is notified by the starting memory display which will cause the variable display game after the variable display game is executed, and the game is performed according to a novel notice mode which has never been done before Can enhance the interest of

In the display mode 1, the timing at which the starting memory display stops from the mini variation is not limited to immediately after the start of the variation display game, and may be any timing as long as the variation display game is being executed. Preferably, notification of reliability including occurrence of reach can be performed by stopping before the decorative symbol stops.

FIG. 142 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the display mode 2 of the start-up storage display in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. The display mode 2 is a mode in which the mini change is continued until the end of the variable display game even after the start memory display moves to the storage display unit 79, and the reliability of the variable display game being executed is not notified.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the number of pending display is "0" and the variable display game is stopped. (B) is a screen showing the timing when the special figure 1 is won and one start memory is generated. In the screen shown in (b), the generated start-up memory is immediately digested.
The start memory is displayed for a moment as 792 during 1 mini change.

(C) is a screen showing a state in which the start storage display in the mini variation 792 moves from the storage 1 display unit 771 to the storage 0 display unit 79 and a new variation display game is started. Up to here, it is the same as FIG. In (d) to (f), mini-variation of the starting memory display continues in the storage unit 79, and the left decorative symbol 761 and the right decorative symbol 7 are maintained while the starting memory display continues the mini fluctuation.
It is a screen which shows the state which each decoration pattern stopped in order of 62 and the inside decoration pattern 763. FIG. In (f), the mini-variation in the storage unit 79 continues until all decorative symbols stop and the result of the variation display game is determined.

(G) is a display of the display of the display 0 without stopping the mini fluctuation at almost the same time as the end of the fluctuation display game.
It is a screen showing a state in which the display of 9 has disappeared.

Thus, in the display mode 2, the mini variation is continued until the variation display game is ended, and the start memory display disappears without notifying the reliability finally. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of being notified of the reliability until immediately before the result of the variable display game is notified, and to enhance the interest of the game by a novel notice mode which has never been seen before.

FIG. 143 is a screen transition diagram to explain display mode 3 of the start-up memory display in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. The display mode 3 is a mode in which the mini-variation of the start storage display immediately before is stopped and the content of the pre-reading is notified each time a winning occurs when there is the start storage.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the fluctuation display game is being performed and the number of pending display is "0". (B) is a screen showing a state where a winning is generated in the special view 1 and the display of the start storage is displayed as mini change 792 on the storage 1 display unit 771.

In (c), the special figure 1 is further prized, and the display of the start storage is displayed as mini change 792 on the storage 2 display unit 772 and the mini change of the start storage display displayed on the storage 1 display unit 771. It is a screen which shows the state (pre-execution notice effect) in which the pre-read content is notified as a five star 794 by stopping.

In (d), the special figure 1 is further prized, and the display of the start memory is displayed as mini change 792 on the storage 3 display unit 773 and the mini fluctuation of the start storage display displayed on the storage 2 display unit 772 Is a screen showing a state in which the preread content is notified as a double star 797 by stopping.

As described above, in the display mode 3, the mini-variation of the start memory display immediately before is stopped each time a winning occurs, and the pre-execution advance presentation effect means of notifying the pre-read contents is provided. Although not illustrated in FIG. 143, when the number of pending displays overflows, mini-variation of the retention display unit 774 (the retention display unit 784 in the special figure 2) is stopped, and the prefetching content is notified. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by a novel and novel look-ahead mode so far, and to suppress the player's stoppage.

In addition, when the winning of the start memory retention 1 occurs during the variation display game in a state where the mini variation of the start storage display displayed on the retention 0 display portion 79 is not stopped, the display is displayed on the retention 0 display portion 79. The mini-variation of the starting memory display being displayed may be stopped to notify the reliability of the currently executing variable display game.

FIG. 144 is a screen transition diagram for explaining a display mode 4 of the start-up storage display in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. The display mode 4 is a mode in which when the winning occurs, the contents of the pre-reading are notified without passing through the mini variation.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the fluctuation display game is being performed and the number of pending display is "0". The start storage display of the storage 0 display 79 is 792 during mini change. (B) is a screen showing a state where a winning is generated in the special view 1 and the display of the start storage is displayed as the seven star 796 in the storage 1 display section 771. Since the start memory display is 7 stars 796, highly reliable pre-read notification is performed.

In (c), the start memory display of the storage 0 display unit 79 which was in the mini fluctuation stopped as the five star 794 and the advance notice of low reliability was performed, but the fluctuation display game is decided by the result of the disconnection It is a screen which shows a state. (D) is a screen showing a state in which the start storage display storage 1 is moved from the storage 1 display unit 771 to the storage 0 display unit 79 and the execution of a new variable display game is started.

(E) is a screen which shows the state which the left decorative pattern 761 stopped by "5". (F) is a screen showing a state in which the right decoration pattern 762 is stopped at “5”, and the display pattern of the left decoration pattern 761 and the display pattern of the right decoration pattern 762 become the same in the reach mode.

As described above, in the display mode 4, when a winning of the starting memory to be read ahead occurs, the contents of read ahead are notified without passing through the mini fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of winning with high reliability, it is notified from the beginning as a pre-read display form, and it is possible to notify the player in advance that the winning with high reliability has occurred.

FIG. 145 is a screen transition diagram explaining the display mode 5 of the start-up storage display in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. In the display mode 5, the start memory display in the stop mode becomes 792 in the mini fluctuation again (pre-execution notice effect restoring means) and becomes the stop mode again (re-notice effect means) more reliable than the previous stop mode. This is an aspect in which the content of the pre-read is notified as a stop mode with a high degree.

(A) is a screen which shows the state in which the variable display game is being performed and four starting memory | storages are displayed. The start memory display is a mini 0 display unit 79 and a 4 display unit 774 being a mini variation 793
, The first display unit 771 is a normal display 792, the second display unit 772 is a five star 794, the third display unit 7
73 is displayed as a 7 star 796.

(B) is a screen which shows the state where the result of the change display game under execution was decided. The start storage display of the storage 0 display section 79 is displayed in the display pattern of the display mode 2 in which the mini variation does not stop until the end of the variation display game. In (c), a new variable display game is started by storage 1, and the start storage display displayed on storage 0 display unit 79 is erased, and start storage display of storage 1 to storage 4 is followed by start storage FIG. 18 is a screen showing a state in which the display is moved from the hold display unit 79 and the hold display unit 771 to the hold display unit 773 so as to close the display.

(D) is a screen which shows the state which the starting memory display moved. In (d), the starting memory is 1
Since it was digested individually, the start memory display displayed as 7 stars 796 in the 3rd display unit 773 is demoted to 792 during mini change after moving to the 2nd display unit 772 (pre-execution notice effect restoring means) . The other start memory display moves in the same display form.

(E) is a screen showing a state in which the result of the variable display game generated by the start memory displayed as the normal display 793 in the storage unit 79 is determined. In (f), a new variable display game is started by the first storage, and the starting storage displayed on the storage 0 display unit 79 is erased, and the starting storage display of the first to third storages is the subsequent starting storage display. FIG. 18 is a screen showing a state of moving from the storage display unit 79 and the storage display unit 771 to the storage display unit 772 so as to be packed.

(G) is a screen which shows the state to which the starting memory display moved. In (g), the starting memory is 1
Since the individual storage was performed, the start memory display displayed as 792 in the mini change in the storage 2 display 772 moves to the storage 1 display 771 and then stops at the double star 797 (re-notice effect means), the original stop It has been promoted from 7 star 796 to double star 797 in the embodiment.

As described above, in the display mode 5, from the mode of the start storage display which is stopping and giving the pre-reading notification, it is demoted again to mini change in 792, and it is stopped again and is promoted to the pre-reading notification heavy rain. Also, FIG.
Although not shown in FIG. 45, when the number of pending displays overflows, mini-variation of the retention display unit 774 or the retention display unit 784 is stopped, and the prefetching content is notified. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by a novel and novel look-ahead mode so far, and to suppress the player's stoppage. In this display mode, the mini change is relegated to 792 and then the stop mode is set again. However, the mini change may be continued without stopping. Also, when stopping again, it stopped in mutual stopping mode of reliability than the original stopping mode, but stopping in the stopping mode same as the original stopping mode or the stopping mode whose reliability is lower than the original stopping mode Also good. As described above, by giving advance notification with a rich pattern, the gaming machine can be enhanced in interest.

FIG. 146 is a screen transition diagram for explaining the display mode 6 of the start-up memory display in the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention. The display mode 6 is a mode in which the start memory display notifying the reliability of the variable display game by the prefetching mode moves to the storage unit 79, and then is promoted to report the high reliability of the variable display game being executed. It is.

(A) is a screen which is performing a variable display game, and is a screen which shows the state where one starting memory is displayed. The starting memory (G1) is 792 during mini change. (B) is a screen showing a state where a winning is generated in the special view 1 and the starting memory 1 which has been mini-varied in the alarm 1 display unit 771 is stopped. Here, it is displayed as a five star 794, and the low reliability is notified and read ahead.

(C) is a screen which shows the state which the result of the fluctuation | variation display game in process of execution determined by cancellation.
In (d), a new variable display game is started by storage 1, and the start storage display displayed on storage 0 display unit 79 is erased, and the start storage display of storage 1 to storage 2 is followed by startup storage It is a screen which shows the state which moves to the holding | maintenance 0 display part 79 and the holding | maintenance 1 display part 771 so that a display may be packed.

(E) is a screen which shows the state which the starting memory display moved. The start storage for executing the variable display game is moved to the storage 0 display section 79 in the form of the same five star 794 as the form notified beforehand by the storage 1 display section 771. (F) is a screen showing a state where the starting memory displayed on the storage unit display 79 is promoted from the five star 794 to the double star 797. Therefore, with regard to the variable display game under execution, with the same starting memory display, before the execution, it is five stars 7 as a prefetch notification.
The low reliability is indicated by displaying 94, and after the execution, the five star 794 is a double star 797 as a preliminary notice.
It will be promoted to the highest reliability and reported.

As described above, in the display mode 6, the reliability is notified as a prefetch notice before the variable display game is executed with the same start storage display, and after the variable display game is performed, the reliability is notified as an advance notification of the variable display game being executed. Therefore, the gaming machine is easy to understand and enhances the interest. In addition, since the degree of reliability may be suddenly promoted while the variable display game is being performed, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game with a novel look-ahead style that has never been available.

[Effect of Modified Example 6 of Second Embodiment]
As described above, according to the sixth modification of the second embodiment of the present invention, the storage 0 display unit 79 is provided to display any one of the display modes 1 to 6, for example, the game state And notice according to the game situation is selected to give notice. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced by a novel and novel look-ahead manner so far.

In addition, in the state where the starting memory is generated, the starting memory display is displayed in a fluctuating state and is displayed in a state where the pre-reading notification is not performed, but the first starting memory display is stopped every winning and the pre-reading notification As a result, the winning is not merely for holding the right of the variable display game, but it is a trigger for preview notification, so it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, since the pre-reading notification before the variable display game is executed and the notice notification after the variable display game are performed by the same start memory display, it is possible to make an advance notice of an easy-to-understand, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, there are various changes such as fluctuation stop timing of start memory display, re-fluctuation after stopping, promotion of stopped start memory display, etc., and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of overflow, the pre-read contents of the storage 4 display unit 774 or the storage 8 display unit 784 are notified, so that the effect of suppressing the player's stoppage is provided.

The embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the description of the invention described above but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the claims. Also, each embodiment can be implemented in duplicate.

By the way, in the conventional gaming machines, the special game state is not started only when the variable display game has a special result, and the special gate (lottery gate provided in the game area after the variable display game has a special result Such as to determine the number of rounds based on the random number extracted based on the passage of the game ball) and to start the special game state according to the number of rounds determined in the auxiliary game The thing is proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2008-132167). In addition, a plurality of specific gates (lottery gates) are provided, and an auxiliary game is executed to determine the type of special gaming state according to the lottery mode corresponding to the specific gate through which the game ball passed after the variable display game became a special result. A gaming machine has also been proposed (e.g.
504).

However, in a gaming machine that executes an auxiliary game that determines the type of special gaming state (such as the number of rounds) by passing a specific gate as described in the above-mentioned patent documents, the contents of the auxiliary game are There was a problem that the player could not understand immediately.
Also, to determine the type of special game state when the game ball passes the specific gate first after the special result is achieved, the game ball fired during the variable display game passes the specific gate, and the player There was a possibility that the problem that the kind of special game state would be decided contrary to the intention of.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, while making the player understand the content of the auxiliary game for selecting the jackpot determination method, the number of jackpot rounds (special game state It is possible to avoid the disadvantage that the type) is determined.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, non-contact sensors (such as infrared sensors) that can detect that a part of a player's body (mainly a hand) has entered a detection range at a predetermined position on a game board There has been proposed a sensor which is provided with a sense sensor and performs a predetermined effect based on detection of a part (mainly a hand) of a player's body by a non-contact sensor during a playable period (for example, JP, 2010-1244, A
45).

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent documents, the input from the non-contact sensor is made effective only during the presentation enabled period, and the non-contact sensor can not be used effectively.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively utilize the non-contact sensor capable of detecting a part of the player's body other than the effect.

In addition, among the conventional gaming machines, there is a gaming board in which a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow down is formed on the front of a gaming board removably housed in a frame, and the gaming board is made of transparent resin A gaming machine has been proposed in which the decorative effect is intended to be improved by arranging a decorative member at the rear and making the decorative member visible through the game board (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-99515).

However, when a game board made of a transparent resin is used as in a game machine as described in the above-mentioned patent documents, static electricity is more likely to be charged compared to a wooden game board, and the charged static electricity makes the game machine May malfunction. Therefore, it is considered that static electricity charged on the game board is released to the side of the grounded frame and removed. However, when the game board is provided with a conductive member capable of coming into contact with the frame, the worker may be injured by the conductive member at the time of transport or removal of the game board.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, the static electricity charged on the transparent resin gaming board can be escaped to the frame side and removed, and at the time of transport or removal of the game board It can also prevent the worker from being injured.

In addition, in the conventional game machine, the game board is made of a transparent resin, and the decoration member is disposed behind, and the game is intended to improve the decoration effect by making the decoration member visible through the game board. Machines have been proposed (e.g., JP-A-2010-99515).

However, in the case of using a game board made of transparent resin as in the game machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, the wiring process for routing the wiring of the electric components disposed on the game board to the rear of the game board is performed. It is At this time, the wiring of the electrical components routed to the rear of the gaming board becomes visible through the gaming board of the transparent member, so the appearance of the rear of the gaming board may be impaired, or the visibility of the decorative member is reduced. There is a problem of causing them to

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, the wiring process of the electric component is performed more efficiently than in the case where the wiring of the electric component is routed to the end of the decoration space through the front of the three-dimensional decoration member. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the appearance of the rear (rear side) of the gaming board and the visibility of the decorative member.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, a movable effect device provided with a movable effect member capable of performing a predetermined effect operation in front of the display unit of the display device is provided, and movable according to the progress of the variable display game There has also been proposed a gaming machine in which the rendering operation is made more complicated by driving the rendering member by a plurality of drive units (for example, JP-A-2011-125543).

However, as in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, if a relatively large movable effect device is disposed around the display device, there is a space for disposing other movable effect devices, decoration members, etc. There is a problem of narrowing. Therefore, if the movable effect member is miniaturized or the operation mode of the movable effect member is made monotonous to secure the space, the effect of the effect is naturally lowered as well, which also causes the interest of the game to be lowered. It will

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively improve the rendering effect by the movable rendering device while efficiently using the limited space around the display device.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, non-contact sensors (such as infrared sensors) that can detect that a part of a player's body (mainly a hand) has entered a detection range at a predetermined position on a game board There has been proposed a sensor which is provided with a sense sensor and performs a predetermined effect based on detection of a part (mainly a hand) of a player's body by a non-contact sensor during a playable period (for example, JP, 2010-1244, A
45).

However, in the gaming machine as described in the above-mentioned patent documents, the input from the non-contact sensor is made effective only during the presentation enabled period, and the non-contact sensor can not be used effectively.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively utilize the non-contact sensor capable of detecting a part of the player's body other than the effect.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment, and is applicable to slot machines as well as gaming machines using gaming balls such as arrange ball gaming machines and ball ball gaming machines. It is applicable.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 game machine 2 main body frame 4 opening / closing frame 5 front frame 5a storage part 5d protrusion pressing part 6 glass frame 6b reinforcement sheet metal 6c conduction part 12 gaming state notification LED
17 Effect button 23 Magnetic sensor 24 Electric wave sensor 30 Game board 31 Game area 32 Game board 32a Guide rail 32b Division member 32f Notch part 34 Center case 34f Distribution space 34g 1st passage gate part (lottery gate)
34h 2nd pass gate (fixed gate)
35 Variable display device (main display device, first display device)
36 General drawing start gate 37 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
38 2nd start winning opening (2nd starting winning area)
40 general winning opening 41 first special variation winning device 42 second special variation winning device 50 collective display 61-63 lens member 77 special storage display area 78 special storage display area 79 storage 0 display 99e notification LED
220 lower effect device 222 cover member 223 movable decorative member 240 upper decorative unit 241b, 274 magnetic sensor housing portion 243b, 275 dummy housing portion 276 radio wave sensor housing portion 300 back side rendering device 330 shutter unit 340 pivoting door 344 magnetic body 400 upper portion Effect device 470 Light guide plate 480 Display (sub display, second display)
500 Right side effect device 580 Rotating cylinder 590 Infrared sensor (motion sensor)
600 game control device 607a 1st passage detection sensor 607b 2nd passage detection sensor 610 CPU part 620 input part 630 output part 640 payout control device 700 effect control device 710 main control microcomputer (1st CPU)
720 Image control microcomputer (2nd CPU)
800 power supply device 900 charge removal unit 901 conductive member 901a fixed portion 901b press receiving portion 901c flat plate portion 901d contact portion 905 housing space forming portion 905a housing space 906 rail conductive portion 906a insertion portion 907 base member 908 conductive member 991 magnetic sensor detection range 992 Detection sensor range

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode,
A display device capable of displaying an image in relation to the variable display game;
Start storage means capable of storing the right to execute the variable display game as start storage within a predetermined number of ranges;
Start-up memory display means for displaying a start-up memory display corresponding to the start-up memory on the display device when the start-up memory is stored in the start-up memory means;
And a prior determination means for determining in advance a stop result mode of the variable display game,
The start memory display means is
The start memory display when the start memory is generated is a mode in which the reliability to be the special result mode is high based on the normal start memory display mode which is a normal mode or the determination result of the prior determination means. It can be displayed in any of a plurality of special start memory display modes,
Variable display game start updating means capable of changing the display mode of the start memory display to any of a plurality of the special start memory display modes when starting the variable display game;
And a start storage display non-display unit configured to hide the start storage display when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display device;
It is possible to execute an advance notice display which is an effect associated with a change of the start memory display to the special start memory display mode,
The ratio of setting the start storage display corresponding to the start storage generated during the non-display of the start storage display by the start storage display non-display means to the special start storage display mode is not 0 and the start storage display non-display A game machine characterized by having a smaller ratio of setting the start storage display corresponding to the start storage generated when the non-display of the start storage display by the means is not performed as the special start storage display mode. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode,
A display device capable of displaying an image in relation to the variable display game;
Start storage means capable of storing the right to execute the variable display game as start storage within a predetermined number of ranges;
Start-up memory display means for displaying a start-up memory display corresponding to the start-up memory on the display device when the start-up memory is stored in the start-up memory means;
And a prior determination means for determining in advance a stop result mode of the variable display game,
The right to execute the variable display game can be generated by winning a game ball to a starting area provided in the gaming area, and there are a plurality of starting areas.
The start memory display means is
The start memory display when the start memory is generated is a mode in which the reliability to be the special result mode is high based on the normal start memory display mode which is a normal mode or the determination result of the prior determination means. It can be displayed in any of a plurality of special start memory display modes,
Variable display game start updating means capable of changing the display mode of the start memory display to any of a plurality of the special start memory display modes when starting the variable display game;
And a start storage display non-display unit configured to hide the start storage display when a predetermined effect is displayed on the display device;
When the variable display game start updating means starts the second variable display game to be executed after the first variable display game for which the start storage display non-display means is not executed, the second change The start-up memory that is to start the display game corresponds to a different start-up memory of the start-up area, and at least a plurality of the start-up memory displays displayed during the first variable display game. A game machine characterized by being changeable to any of memory display modes.